JP6891934B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching means is guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with a specific ball entry means having a specific area in which the game ball moving in the game area can enter, and is based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball-entry means is in an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area and the game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball-entry means in the same area. In some cases, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-197312

By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a demand for new improvements in interest, such as by constantly incorporating new configurations.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of adding new interests.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
The state where the first result is waiting and
There may be a situation where the second result is waiting.
The second result is more favorable to the player than the first result.
Both the first result and the second result may be in a waiting state.
In a state where the first result is waiting and the second result is not waiting, it is taught that the first result is waiting, and the first result and the second result are A first waiting teaching means capable of teaching that both the first result and the second result are waiting in a state where both of the above are waiting.
In a state where the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, the first result and the second result are not taught that the first result is awaited. A second standby teaching means capable of teaching that the first result is not waiting but that the second result is waiting in a state where both of the above and the above are waiting .
It is characterized in that it includes means for allowing the player to recognize in advance the state in which the first result is awaited and the timing in which the state in which the second result is awaited is resolved.

According to claim 1, a new interest can be added .

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, the game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical composition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the incoming ball count processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows the non-special prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows the early detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the type entry process. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory jackpot setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows the end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the blade member opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the trigger correspondence unit control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the residual sphere monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the preceding effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information storage process. It is a front schematic diagram of a central winning unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a rotating body unit. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the route distribution device. It is an exploded perspective view of the route distribution device. It is sectional drawing of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment. It is a plan view and a front schematic view of the route distribution device in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment. It is a plan view and a front schematic view of the route distribution device in another embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .. As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 is composed of an upper side frame constituent portion 11a, a lower side frame constituent portion 11b, a left side frame constituent portion 11c, and a right side frame constituent portion 11d, and is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole. There is. An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituent portion 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and the lower hinge 82 rotatably support the upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame constituent portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 for locking the locking member of the locking device 600 are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, is projected from the lower receiving portion 85 toward the inside of the outer frame 11. Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame constituent portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed between the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened to the front side with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38.

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with the opening / closing axis set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided on the front side of the front frame set 14 at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect can be performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like, which will be described later. It may be damaged or the content of the production may be changed.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter, simply referred to as a handle) 18 projecting toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detecting means (variable resistor) (variable resistor) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 as a launching means, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotating operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed and operated by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launching of the game ball by the launching device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while holding the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward the launching device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be discharged are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate connecting passage 71 and the discharge port 16 which will be described later.

The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated in response to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 was opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Further, various lamps and other light emitting means are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by controlling the change of the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. For example, an annular illumination portion 102 having a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101. Further, error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. A large number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14 are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 in the annular illumination portion 102. ..

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are attached to each other in a front and rear pair, but is attached after being assembled into a round shape as a whole.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached in a state where its peripheral edge is in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39 (game board 30), a launching device 60 and a launching rail that guides the game ball immediately after being launched from the launching device 60. 61 is attached. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b as starting ball means, a through gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as a specific ball winning means, and a special one. The display device 43 and the like are arranged in the through holes formed by the router processing, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 by wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, and the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches and the upper plate 19 Alternatively, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the lower plate 15. For example, if there is a ball in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, 3 pieces, if there is a ball in the general winning opening 31, 5 pieces, and if there is a ball in the variable winning device 32. 10 game balls are paid out. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out opening 36, and a game ball that has not won a prize in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 is discharged to the outside of the game area through the out opening 36. .. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the central winning unit 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4, 39, 40 and the like. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 39, the central winning unit 37 is provided in the central portion of the game area (game board 30), and forms a specific area 401 in which a game ball moving (flowing down) in the game area can enter. The housing 402 is provided. A pair of left and right entry ball openings 403 are formed on both the left and right sides of the housing 402, which serve as entrances for the game balls moving in the game area to enter the specific area 401. Further, the central winning unit 37 has a pair of left and right blade members 404 that are displaced between a closed position that closes each ball opening opening 403 and an open position that opens the ball, and a vane solenoid that opens and closes the blade member 404. It is equipped with a 405 (see the block diagram of FIG. 7). When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entry opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is closed and it is impossible to enter the specific area 401. On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central winning unit 37 is opened and entry into the specific area 401 is permitted.

As will be described in detail later, the blade member 404 has entered the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, and has been won by a winning / failing lottery based on the winning (small hit). ) In that case, it is opened for a predetermined time. Further, in the present embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, and when one is in the open position, the other is in the open position and one is in the closed position. If so, the other is also in the closed position.

The specific area 401 of the present embodiment includes a route distribution area 406 in which the game ball entered from the ball entry opening 403 is first guided, a winning / failing lottery area 407 located below the route distribution area 406, and a type lottery located further below the route distribution area 406. It is divided into a region 408.

Further, in the winning / failing lottery area 407, the game balls entered in the winning / failing lottery area 407 are randomly guided (sorted) to either the type lottery area 408 or the outside of the game area on the back side of the game board 30. The rotating body unit 410 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 40, the rotating body unit 410 includes a unit base 411 fixed to the game board 30 and a substantially annular unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface side of the unit base 411. In addition, a substantially circular accommodating recess 413 is formed corresponding to a substantially central portion of the unit cover 412. Further, the rotating body unit 410 includes a substantially disk-shaped rotating body 414 rotatably provided inside the accommodating recess 413, and a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414 in a certain direction. In the present embodiment, the rotating body 414 is always rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view at a constant cycle. The rotating body motor 415 is composed of a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main control device 261. Further, as will be described in detail later, the rotating body 414 rotates at a constant cycle, but does not rotate at a constant speed.

The rotating body 414 has pocket portions 416 capable of receiving one game ball at each of three locations along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The three pocket portions 416 are divided into two special pocket portions 416a and another (one) non-special pocket portion 416b. The non-special pocket portion 416b opens on the outer peripheral side and the upper side of the rotating body 414 and has a bottom wall portion 417, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414. There is. On the other hand, the special pocket portion 416a opens on the outer peripheral side, the upper side, and the lower side of the rotating body 414, and the bottom wall portion 417 like the non-special pocket portion 416b does not exist. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a colored resin material different from that of the other portions, which makes it easy to distinguish between the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b. It has become.

On the upper surface side of the unit base 411, a motor installation portion 423 on which the rotating body motor 415 is installed and a rotating body installation portion 424 on which the rotating body 414 is installed are formed. Further, on the lower surface side of the unit base 411, a link mechanism (not shown) including three gears for transmitting the driving force of the rotating body motor 415 to the rotating body 414 is provided.

The unit cover 412 is installed so as to surround the rotating body installation portion 424 of the unit base 411, and from the substantially cylindrical tubular wall portion 431 forming the accommodating recess 413 together with the rotating body installation portion 424 and the upper edge of the tubular wall portion 431. It is provided with an upper wall portion 432 extending to the outer peripheral side and a surrounding wall 434 extending upward from the upper edge portion (edge portion of the opening on the inner circumference of the upper wall portion 432) of the cylindrical wall portion 431.

Further, the enclosure wall 434 is provided with a gate portion 435 that communicates the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side of the enclosure wall 434 by forming an opening in a range of about 90 degrees on the front edge side of the accommodating recess 413. .. Further, on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 432, a substantially annular game ball rolling path 433 on which the game ball can roll is formed. The game ball rolling path 433 is inclined forward and downward toward the inner peripheral side of the game ball rolling path 433 with respect to a portion located behind the front edge portion of the accommodating recess 413, and the front edge of the accommodating recess 413. The portion located in front of the portion is inclined downward toward the rear and the inner peripheral side (central portion side in the left-right direction) of the game ball rolling path 433. Therefore, when the game ball falls into the game ball rolling path 433, the game ball rolling path 433 is restricted from falling from the rear side of the accommodating recess 413 or from the left and right sides to the accommodating recess 413 (rotating body 414). Is configured to roll and enter the pocket portion 416 of the rotating body 414 via the gate portion 435 in front of the rotating body 414.

The unit base 411 is also tilted forward in response to the tilt of the unit cover 412, and the rotating body 414 is also tilted forward, that is, the rotation axis of the rotating body 414 is directed upward. It is installed in a posture that tilts slightly forward (a posture that makes it easier for the player in front to see).

Further, the unit base 411 has a safe passage 427 communicating with the type lottery area 408 and an out passage 428 communicating with the outside of the specific area 401 (in the present embodiment, the back side of the game board 30 outside the game area). It is formed. The entrances of the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428 are formed at a position (inner peripheral side of the cylinder wall portion 431) through which the rotating body 414 can pass above the rotating body installation portion 424.

Then, the game ball that entered the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 via the gate portion 435 coincided with the position of the special pocket portion 416a and the entrance of the safe passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotated. At that time, the ball falls downward from the special pocket portion 416a and enters the safe passage 427.

Further, when the game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 via the gate portion 435, the positions of the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance of the safe passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. Even if they match, the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b prevents the game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b from falling (entering) into the safe passage 427 (a gap is formed so that the ball can fall). It is not done).

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed wider than the safe passage 427 (up to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414), and the lower part of the tubular wall portion 431 is omitted above the out passage 428. .. Therefore, when the rotating body 414 further rotates and the positions of the non-special pocket portion 416b in which the game ball is housed and the out passage 428 match, the game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b is moved to the out passage. It will enter 428.

Further, the safe passage 427 is provided with a special ball entry detection switch 461 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting a passing game ball. Then, when the game ball enters the safe passage 427 and the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or the variable winning device 32 is opened. With eight game balls winning as one round, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) in which this is repeated a predetermined number of times is granted. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, the jackpot state is not immediately started, but the type of the jackpot state is determined in the type lottery area 408. When determined, the jackpot state is configured to start.

Further, in the out passage 428 where the game ball is discharged out of the game area when the game ball enters, the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 as a non-special ball entry detection means for detecting the passing game ball Is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special entry detection switch 461 or the non-special entry detection switch 462 is detected, 10 game balls are generated with respect to the upper plate 19 (or lower plate 15). It will be paid out.

The number of game balls to be paid out when the special ball entry detection switch 461 and the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 are detected is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, one or zero. But it may be. Further, in the present embodiment, the safe passage 427 in which the special entry detection switch 461 is arranged corresponds to the special entry means (second entry means), and the out passage 428 in which the non-special entry detection switch 462 is arranged. Corresponds to the non-special ball entry means (first ball entry means).

Further, in the portion of the enclosure wall 434 corresponding to the upper part of the entrance of the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428, an overhanging portion 440 extending from the upper edge portion of the enclosure wall 434 to the inner peripheral side of the enclosure wall 434 is provided. Has been done. The overhanging portion 440 is configured to cover about half of the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 of each pocket portion 416 (special pocket portion 416a, non-special pocket portion 416b) located below the overhanging portion 440 from above. .. Therefore, another game ball is further placed on the upper side of the game ball that has entered the predetermined pocket portion 416, and the two game balls that are vertically overlapped as they are are continuously placed on the safe passage 427 or the out passage 428. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball enters the ball, or for some reason, the game ball jumps over the enclosure wall 434 and directly enters the pocket portion 416 at a position corresponding to the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428.

However, in the present embodiment, since two of the three pocket portions 416 are special pocket portions 416a, the two special pocket portions 416a of the rotating rotating body 414 match the gate portion 435 twice in a row. When a game ball enters the two special pocket portions 416a at the same timing, the game ball enters the safe passage 427 in quick succession (continuously).

In the present embodiment, the entrance of the safe passage 427 is located at the lower right position when the rotating body installation portion 424 is viewed in a plan view, and the entire formation range of the entrance of the safe passage 427 is within the formation range of the gate portion 435. It is provided so as not to fit, and the entrance of the out passage 428 is provided at the upper right position when the rotating body installation portion 424 is viewed in a plan view.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 39 and the like, the central winning unit 37 has a normal passage 701 that guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 (route distribution area 406) to the most upstream portion of the game ball rolling path 433. It is provided with a special passage 702 that guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the middle stream portion of the game ball rolling path 433. The special passages 702 of this embodiment are provided in pairs on the left and right. Further, in the route distribution area 406, a route distribution device 703 as a route distribution means provided at a position where the game ball entered from each pair of left and right entry ball openings 403 falls, and a route distribution device 703 formed below the route distribution device 703. A normal guide unit 704 that guides the game ball to the normal passage 701 and a special guide unit 705 that is formed on both the left and right sides of the route distribution device 703 and guides the game ball to the special passage 702 are provided. .. A switch for detecting the game ball is provided in the special passage 702, and when the switch is detected, an effect of notifying that the game ball is passing through the special passage 702 (sound effect, liquid crystal display). Etc.) may be configured to perform.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 42, the route distribution device 703 has a shaft hole 712 into which a shaft pin 711 extending in the front-rear direction can be inserted, and is rotatably supported by the shaft pin 711. It includes a substantially tubular shaft portion 713, a first wing portion 714 projecting from the shaft portion 713 to the left, and a second wing portion 715 projecting from the shaft portion 713 to the right. The route distribution device 703 of the present embodiment is made of a translucent resin.

Further, the route distribution device 703 has a symmetrical shape centered on the shaft portion 713, and is stable in a reference posture in which the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 project from the shaft portion 713 to the left and right sides. It is configured to be stationary (equilibrium). Further, the guide surfaces 714a and 715a constituting the upper surfaces of the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution device 703 in the reference posture are inclined downward toward both sides and communicate with the special guide portion 705. It is configured as follows.

As shown in FIG. 42, the rear end of the shaft pin 711 is supported by the rear wall portion of the housing 402 that defines the rear portion of the route distribution region 406, and the transparent front portion that defines the front portion of the route distribution means 406. The front end is supported by the panel 717 (bearing hole 717a formed in). Further, although not shown, the rear wall portion of the housing 402 is first located at the rear position of the first wing portion 714 of the route distribution means 406 in the reference posture and at the rear position of the second wing portion 715, respectively. The ball entry lamp and the second ball entry lamp are provided so as not to come into contact with the route distribution means 406. In the present embodiment, the state in which the route distribution device 703 is in the reference posture corresponds to the second guidance state, and the route distribution device 703 is tilted from the reference posture (the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 are up and down. The state in which the posture extends to) corresponds to the first guide state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39, the central winning unit 37 has a pair of left and right introduction passages 718 that guide the game balls entered from each pair of left and right entry opening openings 403 to the back side of the route distribution area 406. It is provided. More specifically, as the introduction passage 718, the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 through the first entry ball opening 403a on the left side of the entry ball opening 403 is moved to a position above the first wing portion 714. A game in which a ball enters a specific area 401 via a first introduction passage 718a (dropped onto the guide surface 714a of the first wing portion 714) and a second entry opening 403b on the right side of the entry opening 403. It is provided with a second introduction passage 718b that guides the ball to a position above the second wing portion 715 (drops it on the guide surface 715a of the second wing portion 715). The distance of the first introduction passage 718a and the distance of the second introduction passage 718b are the same, and the game enters the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b (entrance) almost at the same time. The spheres are discharged from the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b (outlet) at substantially the same time.

Further, at an intermediate position of each introduction passage 718 (first introduction passage 718a and second introduction passage 718b), an entry count switch 437 as an approach detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball (hereinafter, first introduction passage 718a). The one installed in the second entry passage 718b is also referred to as a "first entry count switch 437a", and the one installed in the second introduction passage 718b is also referred to as a "second entry count switch 437b"). In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the first entry opening 403a always passes through the first introduction passage 718a, and the game ball that has entered the second entry passage 403b always passes through the second introduction passage 718b. It is configured to pass through, and a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 is always detected by either the left or right entry count switch 437.

The passage width of each of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b exceeds the diameter of the game ball and is less than twice the diameter of the game ball (for example, about 1.4 times the diameter of the game ball). ing. Further, the outlets of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b are formed at symmetrical positions centered on the shaft portion 713 of the route distribution device 703. Further, the first entry ball count switch 437a and the second entry ball count switch 437b of the present embodiment are located near the respective exits of the corresponding first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b (in this example, the game ball is at the exit). It is provided at a position (for example, 1 cm behind each exit) at the same distance from each outlet (for example, a portion that moves forward toward the front).

Then, when the central winning unit 37 is opened, the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 through the first entry opening 403a or the second entry opening 403b is placed in the first introduction passage 718a or the first introduction passage 718a. It passes through the second introduction passage 718b and falls on the guide surfaces 714a and 715a of the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41 (b) and 41 (c), when the game ball falls only on either the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715, the route distribution device 703 is used. It will rotate (tilt) due to the force received from the game ball. Further, by rotating the route distribution device 703, the guide surfaces 714a and 715a of the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715 communicate with the normal guide portion 704 (first wing portion 714 and second wing portion). The connecting passage to the normal guide portion 704, which was blocked by 715, is opened), and the game ball is guided (entered) to the normal guide portion 704.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), when the game balls fall to the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 at almost the same time (same number, for example, one by one). Will suppress the rotation of the route distribution device 703. Then, by avoiding the rotation of the route distribution device 703, both the game balls that have fallen on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 are guided to the special guide portion 705, respectively.

The normal guide section 704, the normal passage 701, and the game ball rolling path 433 form a first guide route (normal route), and the special guide section 705, the special passage 702, and the game ball rolling path 433 ( The part downstream of the middle stream) constitutes the second guide route (special route). The route distribution device 703 is provided at the branch point between the normal route (normal passage 701) and the special route (special passage 702).

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the rotating body unit 410 is provided with a slide unit 721 which is installed corresponding to the most upstream portion of the game ball rolling path 433 and is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction. .. The slide unit 721 includes a passage-side guide plate 723 that inclines downward to the left, and an out-side guide plate 724 that is connected to the right side of the passage-side guide plate 723 and inclines downward to the right. It includes a member 722 and a slide motor 725 that reciprocates the slide member 722 from side to side. The slide motor 725 is composed of a stepping motor and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main control device 261.

Further, the exit of the normal passage 701 is formed at an upper position of the slide unit 721 (slide member 722), and the game ball that has passed through the normal passage 701 is the passage side guide plate 723 of the slide member 722 or the out side. It will fall on the guide plate 724. In addition, in the left-right direction, the width of the out-side guide plate 724 is wider than the width of the pass-side guide plate 723. Further, in the present embodiment, the boundary portion (top of the slide member 722) between the passing side guide plate 723 and the out side guide plate 724 is located on the right side of the center position in the lateral width direction of the exit of the normal passage 701. The slide speed is set to be faster than the slide speed when it is located on the left side. With this configuration, in the reciprocating operation of the slide member 722, the time when the top of the slide member 722 is located on the left side of the center position in the width direction of the exit of the normal passage 701 is longer than the time when it is located on the right side. It is configured to be. As a result, for example, the game balls that have passed through the normal passage 701 are distributed to the right side at a ratio of 1: 5 by the slide unit 721.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the upper wall portion 432 (game ball rolling path 433) of the unit cover 412 of the rotating body unit 410 is located at the right position of the surrounding wall 434 (rotating body 414). A drop-out opening 727 that communicates with the out passage 428 is formed. That is, the game ball guided to the right side of the game ball rolling road 433 by the slide unit 721 falls into the out passage 428 through the dropout opening 727 and is discharged to the outside of the game area. There is. The dropout opening 727 communicates with a portion of the out passage 428 on the upstream side of the installation position of the non-special entry detection switch 462, and the game falls into the out passage 428 through the dropout opening 727. The ball is also detected by the non-special entry detection switch 462.

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the left side of the game ball rolling road 433 by the slide unit 721 is displaced counterclockwise on the game ball rolling path 433 to the front side, and left and right multiple times in front of the gate portion 435. When the relative positions of the rotating body 414 with the special pocket portion 416a or the non-special pocket portion 416b are matched via the gate portion 435, the rotating body 414 enters the pocket portions 416a and 416b. It will be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the outlets of the pair of left and right special passages 702 are formed at the left and right side positions of the rotating body unit 410 (upper wall portion 432 of the unit cover 412), respectively, and the special passage 702 is formed. The passing game ball enters the middle stream portion of the game ball rolling path 433. Even when the game ball passes through the special passage 702 on the right side, the game ball passes through the special passage 702 because it is guided to a portion of the game ball rolling path 433 downstream of the dropout opening 727. The game ball always enters the special pocket portion 416a or the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435. That is, if the game ball can enter the special guide portion 705 and pass through the special passage 702, it is possible to avoid (skip) the distribution by the slide unit 721, and as a result, the game ball enters the special pocket portion 416a. It is possible to increase the possibility of entering the ball and, by extension, the degree of expectation of a jackpot condition.

In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the rotating body 414 and the slide member 722 are configured to continue to operate at a constant cycle or a constant rhythm. For example, when the game ball is detected by the ball entry count switch 437, the operation is started, and when all the game balls are ejected from the specific area 401 (the specified time has elapsed since all the game balls were ejected). It may be configured to stop (if any).

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 by entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and passing through the safe passage 427 is guided to the type lottery area 408. It is configured as follows. The type lottery area 408 has a 15R entrance 731 that gives a jackpot state of "15 rounds" (15 round jackpot) when a game ball enters, and "7 rounds" when a game ball enters. The 7R entrance 732, which gives the jackpot state (7 rounds jackpot), and the 3R entrance 733, which gives the jackpot state (3 rounds jackpot) of "3 rounds" when the game ball enters. It is provided. Further, a 15R ball entry detection switch 734 that detects a game ball that has entered the 15R ball entry port 731, a 7R ball entry detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered the 7R ball entry port 732, and a 3R ball entry port. A 3R ball entry detection switch 736 that detects a game ball that has entered the 733 is provided.

Further, in the type lottery area 408, a type as a type sorting means for distributing the game balls that have entered the type lottery area 408 to either the 15R entry port 731, the 7R entry port 732, or the 3R entry port 733. A sorting device 741 is provided. The type sorting device 741 guides the start table 742, which first guides the game ball entering the type lottery area 408, and the game ball via the start table 742, and guides the game ball to the 3R entrance 733. The first transfer plate 744, which is distributed to either the guidance passage 743 or "other", and the game ball, which is distributed to "other" by the first transfer plate 744, are guided, and the game ball is inserted into the 7R ball. It is provided with a second transfer plate 747 that is distributed to either the 7R guide passage 745 leading to the mouth 732 or the 15R guide passage 746 leading to the 15R entry port 731.

More specifically, a start table 742 whose upper surface is inclined downward to the right is installed in the upper left portion of the type lottery area 408, and a first transfer plate 744 is installed to the right and slightly downward position of the start table 742. The second transfer plate 747 is installed to the right and slightly below the first transfer plate 744, and the 15R guide passage 746 and the 15R entry port 731 are installed to the right and slightly below the second transfer plate 747. ing. The first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747 have a shaft portion 748 rotatably supported so that the central axis extends in the front-rear direction, and a substantially plate-shaped receiver protruding to the right from the shaft portion 748. It is equipped with a part 749. Further, below the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747, a first cam 750 and a second cam 751 that come into contact with (support) the lower surfaces of the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747 are provided, respectively. The first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are rotated by a motor (not shown), so that the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747 are rotated (tilted) and displaced.

In the first transfer plate 744 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is slightly inclined downward to the right, and the first transfer plate 744 communicates with the upper surface side of the second transfer plate 747. The upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is greatly inclined downward so as to be displaceable between the 3R guide passage 743 and the falling position communicating with the 3R guide passage 743. Further, in the second transfer plate 747, the upper surface of the receiving portion 747 is slightly inclined downward to the right, and the advance position communicating with the 15R guide passage 746 and the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 are higher than when they are in the advance position. It is configured to be able to be displaced between the 7R guide passage 745 and the falling position communicating with the 7R guide passage 745 by being greatly inclined downward.

The first cam 750 and the second cam 751 have the same shape and the same size, and rotate in the counterclockwise direction of FIG. 39, for example. Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation cycles of the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are not synchronized, and for example, the first cam 750 orbits slightly faster than the second cam 751. Further, the game ball guided to the 3R guide passage 743 is confirmed to enter the 3R entrance 733, and the game ball guided to the 7R guide passage 745 is confirmed to enter the 7R entrance 732. However, the game ball guided to the 15R guide passage 746 is configured to be confirmed to enter the 15R entry port 731.

Then, when the game ball guided to the first transfer plate 744 via the start table 742 moves to the right side of the first transfer plate 744, the first transfer plate 744 is in the forward position (range). If so, the game ball is guided to the second transfer board 747. Further, when the game ball guided by the second transfer plate 747 moves to the right side of the second transfer plate 747, if the second transfer plate 747 is in the postponement position (range), the game ball is 15R. You will be guided to the guidance passage 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the second transfer plate 747 moves to the right side of the second transfer plate 747, if the second transfer plate 747 is in the drop position (range), the game ball is 7R. You will be guided to the guidance passage 745. Further, when the game ball guided by the first transfer plate 744 moves to the right side of the first transfer plate 744, if the first transfer plate 744 is in the drop position (range), the game ball is 3R. You will be guided to the guidance passage 743. In the present embodiment, after the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, any one of the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is detected. In some cases, the corresponding type of jackpot state is started.

The front and rear widths of the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747 are wider than the left and right widths (width in the centrifugal direction). Further, the start base 742, the first transfer plate 744, and the second transfer plate 747 are configured not only to be inclined downward to the right as described above, but also to be slightly inclined downward to the front. That is, the game ball entering the type lottery area 408 through the safe passage 427 is guided to the start table 742 from the back side of the start table 742, and is placed on the start table 742, the first transfer plate 744, and the second transfer plate 747. Is configured to move to the front right side. In addition, the entrance portions of the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 cover the range in which the game ball is guided by the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747. In addition, the received game balls are gathered in a passage having a width through which the game balls can pass one by one (substantially funnel-shaped). Further, the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are arranged corresponding to the portions on the rear side of the lower surface of the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747 (receiving portion 749), and the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage are arranged. It is configured so as not to interfere with the 745.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the distance of the 3R guide passage 743 is longer than the distance of the 7R guide passage 745, and the distance of the 7R guide passage 745 is longer than the distance of the 15R guide passage 746. Further, the average time required for the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 to be detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736 due to the difference in the distances of the guidance passages 743, 745, and 746 (3R arrival time). The average time (7R arrival time) required for the game ball entering the type lottery area 408 to be detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735 is shorter than that, and the type lottery is shorter than the 7R arrival time. The average time (15R arrival time) required for the game ball that has entered the area 408 to be detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is shorter. For example, the 3R arrival time is set to "9 seconds to 10 seconds", the 7R arrival time is set to "6 seconds to 7 seconds", and the 15R arrival time is set to "3 seconds to 4 seconds".

Further, the rotating body 414 takes "9 seconds" to make one round. However, the speed of the rotating body 414 is not constant. That is, of the two special pocket portions 416a provided side by side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 414, the special pocket portion 416a on the upstream side that reaches the gate portion 435 first matches the entrance of the safe passage 427 (front position). The time until the special pocket portion 416a on the downstream side, which later reaches the gate portion 435, matches the entrance of the safe passage 427 (until the front position is set) is "1.5 seconds". , It is designed to rotate faster than other states. The rotation speed of the rotating body 414 is adjusted by changing the distance between the special pocket portions 416a in the rotation direction of the rotating body 414 (for example, the rotation speed of the rotating body 414 is made constant). Is possible.

Then, at the timing when the two special pocket portions 416a sequentially match the gate portion 435 provided in front of the rotating body 414 (without sandwiching the non-special pocket portion 416b), a plurality of game balls are formed on the gate portion 435. When the ball is waiting (stopped) to enter the pocket portion 416 in the peripheral portion, the game ball enters the two special pocket portions 416a in succession, and by extension, the type lottery area 408 Two game balls will enter in succession. In this case, the time lag from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 to when the next game ball enters the type lottery area 408 is the shortest, and the time is "1.5 seconds".

With this configuration, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in a row, the preceding game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743, and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 7R guide passage 745. Alternatively, when the situation is such that the player is guided to the 15R guidance passage 746, the preceding game ball enters the 3R entry port 733 (detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736) before the subsequent game. The ball enters the 7R entry port 732 or the 15R entry port 731 (detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735 or the 15R entry detection switch 734). Further, for example, in the case where two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in a row, the preceding game ball is guided to the 7R guide passage 745, and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746. In this situation, the succeeding game ball enters the 15R entry port 731 before the preceding game ball enters the 7R entry port 732 (detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735). It is designed to make a ball (detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734).

Of the two special pocket portions 416a provided side by side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 414, the special pocket portion 416a on the downstream side matches the entrance of the safe passage 427 (after being set to the front position), and then upstream. The time until the special pocket portion 416a on the side matches the entrance of the safe passage 427 (until the front position is set) is "7.5 seconds". Therefore, even if the game ball that has entered the special pocket portion 416a on the downstream side enters the type lottery area 408 and then the game ball that has entered the special pocket portion 416a on the upstream side enters the type lottery area 408, There is a time lag of "7.5 seconds", even if the game ball that entered earlier in the type lottery area 408 was guided to the 3R guidance passage 743, and the game ball that entered later was guided to the 15R entry port 731. Even so, the later game ball is not detected by the 15R entry detection switch 734 before the earlier game ball is detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736 (that is, the type lottery area 408 is displayed). Since there is a difference of 7.5 seconds between the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 and the succeeding game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746. , The preceding game ball is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 with 1.5 seconds to 2.5 seconds remaining, and the subsequent game ball is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 in 3 seconds to 4 seconds. Therefore, the detection of the succeeding game ball cannot overtake the detection of the preceding game ball).

In the present embodiment, the "15-round jackpot" corresponds to the second special gaming state (second privilege, second advantageous state, second grant) for the "7-round jackpot" and the "7-round jackpot". The "7-round jackpot" corresponds to the first special gaming state (first privilege, first advantageous state, first grant) for the "15-round jackpot", and the second special gaming state for the "three-round jackpot". Corresponding to (2nd privilege, 2nd advantageous state, 2nd grant), "3 round jackpot" is the 1st special gaming state (1st privilege, 1st) for "15 round jackpot" and "7 round jackpot". It corresponds to the advantageous state, the first grant). Further, the 15R entry port 731 is configured as a second type entry means for the 7R entry port 732 and the 3R entry port 733, and the 7R entry port 732 is a first type entry means for the 15R entry port 731. And is configured as a second type entry means for the 3R entry port 733, and the 3R entry port 733 is configured as a first type entry means for the 15R entry port 731 and the 7R entry port 732. To. Further, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is configured as a second type ball entry detection means for the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 and the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 is for the 15R ball entry detection switch 734. It is configured as a first type ball entry detection means and as a second type ball entry detection means for the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is a 15R ball entry detection switch 734 and a 7R ball entry detection. It is configured as a first-class ball entry detection means for the switch 735.

Further, the 15R arrival time corresponds to the second type determination time for the 7R arrival time and the 3R arrival time, the 7R arrival time corresponds to the first type determination time for the 15R arrival time, and the second type determination time for the 3R arrival time. It corresponds to the type determination time, and the 3R arrival time corresponds to the first type determination time with respect to the 15R arrival time and the 7R arrival time. In addition, the 15R guide passage 746 is configured as a second guide passage (second entry route) for the 7R guide passage 745 and the 3R guide passage 743, and the 7R guide passage 745 is a first guide passage for the 15R guide passage 746 (the first guide passage for the 15R guide passage 746). It is configured as a first entry route) and as a second guide passage (second entry route) for the 3R guide passage 743, and the 3R guide passage 743 is for the 15R guide passage 746 and the 7R guide passage 745 (first). It is configured as one entry route).

Further, the type lottery area 408 is provided near the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743, and is provided near the 3R early detection switch 753 for detecting a game ball moving in the 3R guide passage 743 and the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745. A 7R early detection switch 754 that detects a game ball moving in the 7R guidance passage 745 is provided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a translucent covering cover 756 (a portion with a scattered dot pattern in FIG. 4) covering the front of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745. The visibility of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 is slightly reduced.

Further, a translucent 3R seal 757a marked with "3R" is attached to the covering cover 756 at the portion covering the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743, and "7R" is attached at the portion covering the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745. The marked semi-transparent 7R sticker 757b is attached, and the semi-transparent 15R sticker 757c marked "15R" is attached at the portion covering the 15R entry port 731. As will be described in detail later, when the game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the corresponding sound effect is derived. Basically, if a game ball enters the 3R seal 757a, 7R seal 757b, or 15R seal 757c that looks like a winning opening (if the game ball enters the back side), the jackpot state of the corresponding type is It can be recognized as being granted. In the present embodiment, the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 constitute the early detection means. Further, the 3R seal 757a, the 7R seal 757b, and the 15R seal 757c form an entrance display unit.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first start winning device 33a is provided at the lower left and the lower right of the central winning unit 37 when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front. The second start winning device 33b is provided directly below the central winning unit 37. Further, the second start winning device 33b includes a pair of opening / closing members 33c provided on both sides. In the present embodiment, a protrusion is provided directly above the second start winning device 33b, and it is virtually impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting winning device 33b when the opening / closing member 33c is closed. It has become.

As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are the first start winning switch 224a and the second starting winning prize as the starting ball detecting means for detecting the entered game ball, respectively. It is equipped with a switch 224b. Then, when a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a or 224b, a "small hit" that opens the blade member 404 to open the specific area 401, or a big hit that opens the variable winning device 32. A winning or losing lottery is held to determine whether or not the "big hit" that causes the state is won. Further, when a winning / losing lottery is performed based on the detection by the first starting winning switch 224a and the second starting winning switch 224b, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for teaching the result of the winning / losing lottery. It is configured to be done. In addition, there are "small hit" and "big hit" as "hits" in the winning / failing lottery, and based on the detection of the start winning switch 224a and 224b, either of these "hits" or the blade member 404 A lottery is held to determine whether any of the variable winning device 32 and the variable winning device 32 will be "off".

In the present embodiment, a common winning / failing lottery is performed depending on whether the detection is performed by the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, and both are specially displayed. The device 43 is configured to display variations, but the first special display device that displays variations to teach the result of the winning / failing lottery performed based on the detection by the first start winning switch 224a. It is also possible to provide a second special display device for performing variable display for teaching the result of the winning / losing lottery performed based on the detection by the second starting winning switch 224b. Further, when such a configuration is adopted, each variation display is stored separately, and the corresponding variation display is digested in the order of storage or so that one is prioritized over the other. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratio of the type of jackpot state given when winning in the winning / losing lottery may be different or the same.

The through gates 34 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured to allow game balls moving in the game area to pass one by one. Further, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 for detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c). Then, when the ball is won by the ball entry assist lottery, the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

A special display device 43 and a normal symbol display device 41 are provided in the upper right portion of the game board 30. The special display device 43 of the present embodiment is composed of eight lamps, and the ordinary symbol display device 41 is composed of two lamps. The configuration of the special display device 43 and the ordinary symbol display device 41 is not particularly limited, and may be configured by, for example, a larger number of lamp groups, a 7-segment display device, a dot display device, and a liquid crystal display. It may be composed of a display device such as a device.

Further, regarding the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b, a switching display (variable display) for teaching the lottery result of the winning / losing lottery is started, and a predetermined time is set. Later, when the variable display is stopped, the mode corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery is displayed. Further, the display content of the special display device 43 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is definitively displayed.

In addition, when a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or eight game balls are won in the variable winning device 32 as one round, and this is 15 A jackpot that is repeated many times (hereinafter referred to as "direct hit jackpot") is given. In this embodiment, not only when the "big hit" is won in the winning / failing lottery based on the winning balls in the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b, but also as described above, the special pocket of the specific area 401. A jackpot state also occurs when a game ball enters the unit 416a (the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461).

In addition, with respect to the normal symbol display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, a switching display (variation display) for displaying the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variation display is started. When stopping, the mode corresponding to the result of the ball entry assist lottery is displayed. Further, the display content of the normal symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, and the result of the ball entry assist lottery is definitively displayed.

Further, when the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variation display for that amount is performed after the variation display performed at that time is completed. It has become. That is, the variable display is put on standby (held). The maximum number of times this variable display is held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is normal provided on the side of the normal symbol display device 41. It is lit and displayed by the fluctuation hold lamp 44. The normal fluctuation hold lamp 44 of the present embodiment is composed of two lamps, and the number of hold lamps is taught by appropriately switching the lighting, extinguishing, and blinking states of each lamp.

In addition, the upper part of the central winning unit 37 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and a decorative pattern with a number pattern attached to a predetermined pattern is attached as an ancillary for the production in accordance with the variable display of the special display device 43. A decorative pattern display device 42 for varying display is provided. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the auxiliary display content is determined by the sub control device 262 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed by the special display device 43. The display is performed by the display control device 45 described later.

Further, when a game ball newly enters the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the variation display of the special display device 43, the variation display for that amount is performed after the end of the variation display performed at that time. It has a structure that is called. That is, the variable display of the special display device 43 is put on standby (holding). The maximum number of times of this pending fluctuation display is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, the maximum number of fluctuations is up to 4 times in total corresponding to the game balls entered in the start winning devices 33a and 33b. The display is suspended.

Further, the number of times of holding the fluctuation display of the special display device 43 is lit and displayed by the special fluctuation holding lamp 46 provided on the side of the special display device 43. The special variable hold lamp 46 is composed of two lamps, and the number of hold lamps is taught by appropriately switching the lighting, extinguishing, and blinking states of each lamp. In addition, even if the game ball newly wins the start winning device 33 during the big hit state or the small hit state (while the blade member 404 is open), the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved, and the fluctuation display is a big hit. Executed after the end of the state or small hit state. The decorative symbol display device 42 may also display a hold icon for teaching the number of hold times of the variable display of the special display device 43.

The variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is arranged in the lower center of the game area (game board 30). Further, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which the game ball can be won in the big hit state.

Further, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is attached with a rail 50 that guides the game ball launched from the launching device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball launched by the rotation operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail constituent portion 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituent portion 52. The game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail constituent portion 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail constituent portion 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surfaces of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the rail 50 may flow backward until the game ball launched by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituents 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. Be taken.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate continuous passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate continuous passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 lowers the game ball that has fallen from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 that guides the dish 15 is formed. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball returns to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. It is discharged.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate continuous passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate and a passage leading to the lower plate continuous passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to almost close the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, in the state where the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion on the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71. It should be noted that the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance in the closed state of the front frame set 14. The game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate connecting passage 73 are filled with the game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower plate connecting passage 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71), and the lower plate connecting passage 71 overflows. It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate continuous passage 71. By the presence of the fullness detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate continuous passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, control such as prohibiting the launch of the launching device 60 is performed. When the stagnation of the game ball in the lower plate continuous passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the launching device 60 is allowed to be launched.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and the like. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally so as to be partially overlapped in the front-rear direction, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying the game balls. And a protective cover made of resin are attached. The payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack. Therefore, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the central winning unit 37 and the like from behind is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, are detachably attached.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is housed in the back surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). Further, the storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings (not shown). The game ball collected by the ball collection mechanism is guided to the discharge passage portion 217, which will be described later, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main control device 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member has a structure that cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily detect that the substrate box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the game board 30 has a ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection means) that detects a game ball that has entered the various winning openings corresponding to various winning openings such as a general winning opening 31 as a ball entry means. Is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b as starting ball detection means, respectively. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board surface relay board that is electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221 and the count switch 223 and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. .. The first board surface relay board relays the winning port switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261 as the main control means, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the start winning switch 224a, 224b for detecting the entry into the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, and the entry count switch 437 provided in the central winning unit 37 (first entry count switch 437a, second entry). Count switch 437b), special entry detection switch 461, non-special entry detection switch 462, round entry detection switch (15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 735, 3R entry detection switch 736), and The early detection switches 753 and 754 are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without passing through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are transmitted based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. (Except when detected by the through gate switch 225, the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and the early detection switches 753, 754).
In addition, although not shown, a solenoid for a large winning opening that opens the large winning opening is provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and a pair of opening / closing members 33c are provided by the starting winning device 33. A solenoid for a start port that drives opening and closing is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a combination of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with the open / close axis extending in the vertical direction as the axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal plate 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current gaming state (big hit state, high probability state, etc.), a front frame set 14 or the inside detected by the open detection switches 91 and 92 described later. It is paid out from a terminal for outputting information on opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower plate full error, a tank ball no error, and a payout error, and a payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information on the number of prize balls is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded with, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the portion on the left side in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism portion 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclining toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor or the like. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power supply from the outside. There is. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball recovery mechanism described above flow in, and the game balls are placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won each winning opening such as the general winning opening 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state of being stacked in the front-rear direction. Has been done.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one substrate (printed circuit board).

Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as ball clogging in the payout motor unit occurs, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball clogging can be eliminated (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, at the end of business of the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Is thrown in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 610 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 610 and rotated in one of them. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the extension wall portion 83 has a configuration. The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in the above, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right lower part of the inner frame 12 on the back side (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main control device 261 and the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body, and when the detection unit is immersed in the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off by pressing the detection unit on the back surface of the front frame set 14 when the front frame set 14 is closed, and the detection unit returns to the protruding state when the front frame set 14 is opened. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by being pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11, and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) as the special game state control means and the open / close control means is equipped with the CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the data is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is used when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, the value of I / O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and conversely, restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is the main process when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Is executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, a special display device 43, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the above-mentioned special display device 43 and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input / output port 505 has a winning port switch 221, a count switch 223, a starting winning switch 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, a ball entry count switch 437, and a special one. Various detection switches such as ball entry detection switch 461, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, early detection switches 753, 754, various substrates, and blade solenoids that open and close the blade member 404. 405, the rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, the slide motor 725 that reciprocates the slide member 722, the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747 are tilted (the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are tilted). Various electric parts such as a motor (to rotate) are connected. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output ports 505 are configured by these terminal portions and the like.

The sub control device 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, input / output port 554, bus line 555, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., are provided, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are provided. It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected to the input / output port 554. Further, a speaker SP, an effect button 125, various illumination units, and lamps 102 and 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the sub control device 262. Then, the display is performed according to the display of the special display device 43.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

In the backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of power off, each register, and the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similar to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured so that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 There is a command buffer that stores the commands sent from.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set as the initial setting. It is turned off when the process is restored or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261 to recover power. These are the three payout return commands that are sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the payout permission flag, initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main control device 261 and the launch control device 312, the payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 is a ball lending operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. It is electrically connected to each of the above, and it takes in the command of the ball lending operation by the player and outputs it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the detection that the player is touching the handle 18 by the sensor signal, and the launch prohibition button 18a for stopping the launch ( The launching device 60 is driven on condition that the launching device 60 is not operated (see FIG. 1), and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 259, and a bus line 530,531. And have. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP526) is executed. As a result, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP526 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like with the necessary operating power to each of them through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power via a control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the control system drive voltage of 5 volt for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. To.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means draws lots using various counter information at the time of the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the first and second start winning switch 224a and 224b, the jackpot for opening the variable winning device 32 and the specific area 401 (blade member 404) are opened. The winning random number counter C1 used for the winning / losing lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small hit, and the variation as the variation time random number generation means used to determine the variation display time (fluctuation time) performed by the special display device 43. Whether or not to open the opening / closing member 33c of the start winning device 33b based on the detection of the time selection counter C2, the initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the through gate switch 225. It is decided to use the normal symbol random number counter C3 used for the ball entry assist lottery.

The counters C1, C2, CINI, and C3 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counter returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 is provided with a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2, and a normal fluctuation holding area for storing the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3. Has been done. The special variable hold area and the normal variable hold area both have one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st to hold 4th area).

Further, in each holding area of the special fluctuation holding area, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b. Stored in series. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the special display device 43 up to a total of four times as described above. Further, in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times as described above.

Explaining each counter in detail, for example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 399, reaches the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 399), and then 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the winning random number counter C1 is stored in the winning random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first or second start winning devices 33a and 33b (detected by the first and second start winning switches 224a and 224b), the winning random number stored in the winning random number counter buffer The value of the counter C1 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

In the present embodiment, in the winning / losing lottery performed based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the special fluctuation holding area, one of "small hit", "big hit", and "missing" is won. The number of random numbers that serve as "big hits" is one, and the value is "0". That is, the "big hit" is won with a probability of 1/400, the mode corresponding to the "big hit" (combination of lighting lamps) is stopped and displayed on the special display device 43, and a big hit state of 15 rounds occurs. Become.

Further, the number of random number values that are "small hits" is 398, and the value is "2-399". In particular, the "small hit" of the present embodiment includes a "short small hit" in which the specific area 401 (blade member 404) is opened for 0.5 seconds and a "long small hit" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. There is a "hit". Therefore, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, "2 to 21" corresponds to "long small hit" and "22 to 399" corresponds to "short small hit". Further, when the "short small hit" is won, the mode corresponding to the "short small hit" (combination of lighting lamps) is stopped and displayed on the special display device 43, and when the "long small hit" is won, the special display device is displayed. In 43, the mode corresponding to the “long small hit” (combination of lighting lamps) is stopped and displayed, and the blade member 404 is opened for a specified time.

By the way, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, "1" is a value corresponding to "off", and in the case of "off", in the special display device 43, the mode corresponding to "off" (the lamp that lights up). Combination) is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a hit / fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a “small hit” or a “big hit”.

In the present embodiment, after the jackpot state ends, while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, the variable display time (variable time) on the special display device 43 is shortened to the gaming state. Hereinafter, the gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 is shortened is referred to as a "time reduction mode", and the gaming state in which the fluctuation display of the normal length is performed is referred to as a "normal mode". In the time reduction mode, when the holding fluctuation display of the special display device 43 continuously wins a small hit (the blade member 404 is temporarily closed, the fluctuation display is performed, and then the variation display is opened). However, since the fluctuation time is short), the blade member 404 is opened substantially continuously (in quick succession). Therefore, it is easy to collectively enter a plurality of game balls into the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

Further, in the time reduction mode, the opening / closing member 33c of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently in the “high ball entry state”, and the opening / closing member 33c is hardly opened in the “low ball entry state”. Compared with the mode, it is easier to let the game ball enter the second start winning device 33b. Specifically, in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 for displaying the result of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 34 is 10 seconds, and the ball entry is made. When the assist lottery is won, the opening time of the opening / closing member 33c is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the opening / closing member 33c when winning in the ball entry assist lottery is 2 seconds.

The fluctuation time selection counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 9, for example, to reach the upper limit value (that is, 9) and then return to the lower limit value of 0. The fluctuation time selection counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is stored in the fluctuation time selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b, the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 stored in the fluctuation time selection counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 when a "small hit" is made in the winning / losing lottery is 2 seconds or 3 seconds. It should be noted that the first and second fluctuation time selection tables referred to when determining whether the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 corresponds to "2 seconds fluctuation" or "3 seconds fluctuation" with respect to the ROM 502 are displayed. It is provided. In addition, in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the case of "big hit" or "missing" in the winning / losing lottery is "7 seconds". Further, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 is uniformly "0.1 seconds" regardless of the result of the winning / losing lottery.

The size and range of each counter are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ordinary symbol random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 9, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9), the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is usually acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of winning random number values is eight, and the range is "1 to 8." When the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C3 is acquired, the fluctuation display is displayed for a predetermined time on the ordinary symbol display device 41. After that, the symbol corresponding to winning or losing (“0” or “-” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a predetermined time. ..

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. When the game ball is paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added to end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the present process is terminated as it is. In the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311. Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S303, the random number update process is executed. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the fluctuation time selection counter C2, and the normal symbol random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (399, 9, and 9, respectively in this embodiment). When it reaches, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. To do. Further, in step S306, the ball entry count process associated with the entry of the central winning unit 37 into the specific area 401 is executed, and in step S307, the detection by the special entry detection switch 461 (safe through the special pocket portion 416a). The special winning process associated with the entry into the passage 427) is executed, and in step S308, the non-special winning process associated with the detection by the non-special entry detection switch 462 (entry into the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b) is performed. Execute special winning process.

In the following step S309, the early detection process accompanying the detection by the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 is executed, and in step S310, the detection by the round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736 (15R ball entry port). 731, 7R entry port 732, entry into 3R entry port 733) is executed. After step S310, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a winning / failing random number storage area for storing the value of the winning random number counter C1, a variable time random number storage area for storing the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2, and a reserved fluctuation A first start winning flag is provided to determine whether or not the display is based on a ball entering the first start winning device 33a. Further, in the present embodiment, in the special fluctuation holding area (separate from the area for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2), in the winning / losing lottery based on the entry into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. A big hit occurrence flag indicating that the player has won the "big hit", a miss flag indicating that the player has "missed", a long small hit occurrence flag indicating that the player has won the "long small hit", and a "short small hit" winning. The short small hit generation flag is provided. Further, a 2-second fluctuation flag, a 3-second fluctuation flag, and a 7-second fluctuation flag indicating the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 are provided.

First, in step S501, the value of the hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, " 4 ”) It is determined whether or not it is less than. If a negative determination is made in step S501, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S501, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33a based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are stored in the first vacant holding area of the special fluctuation holding area. In step S505, the first start winning flag of the holding area in which the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are stored is turned on.

In the following step S506, a winning / failing determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the “small hit” or the “big hit”. The details of the pass / fail determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, a fluctuation time determination process for determining the fluctuation time in the special display device 43 is performed based on the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

After that, in step S508, the starting command setting process is performed. In the starting command, the hold-stored fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) is used to enter either the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. Information indicating whether the fluctuation information is based on (first fluctuation display or second fluctuation display), information indicating "small hit" or "big hit", and information indicating fluctuation time are included, and the next external output process (step S201) is included. (See) is output to the sub-control device 262.

Here, the details of the pass / fail determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the type of small hit (long small hit, short small hit) is also determined in the hit / fail determination process.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches the value "0" corresponding to the "big hit". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, does the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area match "1", which is a value corresponding to "off" in step S5103? Determine if not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined to be "off", the off flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined to be a "small hit", the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5105 is "long small". It is determined whether or not it matches any of "2 to 21" which is a value corresponding to "hit". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the long small hit generation flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5105, that is, if it is determined to be a "short small hit", the short small hit generation flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this process ends.

Next, the fluctuation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode is used. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, the 0.1 second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special display device 43 is 0.1 second is set to on. , End this process. That is, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the corresponding variation display is uniformly 0.1 seconds regardless of whether the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, a long small hit, a short small hit, or a miss.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag is set in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. When affirmative determination is made in step S5203, that is, when it is determined to be a "long small hit", the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5204 is "0". It is determined whether or not it matches with either of "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is any of "3 to 9", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special display device 43 in step S5205 After turning on the 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that is 3 seconds, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, in step S5206, after turning on the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, this process is performed. finish.

If a negative determination is made in step S5203, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short small hit occurrence flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, that is, when a "short small hit" occurs, the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is "0, 1" in step S5208. It is determined whether or not it matches with either of.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5205, the 3-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 is set to 3 seconds is turned on, and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5206, the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 is set to 2 seconds is turned on, and then this process is performed. finish. That is, it is more likely that a longer fluctuation time (3 seconds) will be selected when a "long small hit" occurs than when a "short small hit" occurs.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5207, that is, if it is a big hit or a miss, in step S5209, a 7-second variation indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 is 7 seconds. After turning on the flag, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after the processing of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined by the second start. It is determined by the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, the hold counter Na is incremented by 1 in step S510.

In the following step S511, each value of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is stored in the first vacant holding area of the special fluctuation holding area. In step S512, a hit / fail determination process is performed. The hit / fail determination process in step S512 is the same as the pass / fail determination process in step S506, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S513, the fluctuation time determination process is performed. The hit / fail determination process in step S513 is the same as the variation time determination process in step S507, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, the starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through-gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending fluctuation displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, on the condition that the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603 and the normal hold counter is reached. Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the following step S604, a random number related to the result is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passing process is completed.

Next, the ball entry count process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the first ball entry count switch 437a provided in the first introduction passage 718a is detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, it is determined in step S7202 whether or not there is detection of the second ball entry count switch 437b provided in the second introduction passage 718b. If a negative determination is made in step S7202, in step S7203, a first ball entry command for informing the sub control device 262 that the ball has entered the first ball entry opening 403a (first introduction passage 718a) side. To set.

After step S7203, in step S7204, the value of the ball entry counter as the first counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401 is added by 1. In the following step S7205, the setting process of the monitoring timer, which is taken into consideration in the remaining ball monitoring process, is performed. In the present embodiment, "10000" is set in the monitoring timer every time the ball entry count switch 437 is detected. Further, even if a predetermined value is already set in the monitoring timer, "10000" is overwritten. The monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in a normal process (remaining ball monitoring process described later) performed every 4 mec. After the step S7205, this process ends.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7202, that is, when both the first ball entry count switch 437a and the second ball entry count switch 437b are detected, the sub control device 262 is determined in step S7206. Both ball entry commands that notify that the ball has entered both sides of the first entry opening 403a (first introduction passage 718a) side and the second entry opening 403b (second introduction passage 718b) side. To set.

As described above, the first ball entry count switch 437a and the second ball entry count switch 437b are located near the outlets of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b by the same distance from each outlet. When the game ball is detected (almost) simultaneously by the first ball entry count switch 437a and the second ball entry count switch 437b, the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b are provided. The game balls are discharged from the outlet almost at the same time, and the game balls are dropped to the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution device 703 almost at the same time.

After step S7206, in step S7207, the value of the ball entry counter as the first counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401 is added by 2. After that, the monitoring timer is set in step S7205 described above, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7201, it is determined in step S7208 whether or not the second ball entry count switch 437b is detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7208, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7208, the sub-control device 262 is informed that the ball has entered the second entry opening 403b (second introduction passage 718b) side in step S7209. 2 Set the ball entry command.

After step S7209, in step S7204 described above, the value of the ball entry counter is added by 1, and in step S7205, the monitoring timer is set, and then this process ends.

When the sub-control device 262 receives the first ball entry command, the normal ball entry sound effect is derived, and the first wing portion 714 of the route distribution device 703 is arranged behind the first wing portion 714 (not shown). When the entry lamp is turned on and the second entry command is received, a normal entry sound effect is derived, and a second entry (not shown) arranged behind the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution device 703 is derived. When the lamps are turned on and both entry commands are received, a special entry sound effect is derived and the first entry lamp and the second entry lamp are quickly blinked.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of the game ball by the special ball entry detection switch 461. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7301, in step S7302, the jackpot middle flag, which will be described later, is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the jackpot is in the jackpot state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, the present process is terminated as it is. That is, even if the game ball enters the safe passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 during the jackpot state, the amount is that much. The right to generate a jackpot condition is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, it is determined in step S7303 whether or not the special winning flag indicating that the special entry detection switch 461 has been detected has already been turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in the state where it has already been decided to generate the jackpot state (the right to generate the jackpot state is granted), even if the special ball entry detection switch 461 is repeatedly detected, the amount is correspondingly. The jackpot is invalid.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7303, the special winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, at the stage when the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, only the right to generate a jackpot state is granted, and it is determined which type of jackpot state is granted. In addition, the jackpot state is not started until the type is decided.

Next, the non-special winning process in step S308 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of the game ball by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7402, and then this process ends.

Next, the early detection process in step S309 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7501, it is determined whether or not the 3R early detection switch 753 has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, in step S7502, a 15R jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is 15 rounds, a 7R jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is 7 rounds, or a 3R indicating that the jackpot is 3 rounds. Determines if any of the jackpot flags are turned on.

If a negative determination is made in step S7502, that is, if the type of jackpot state has not yet been determined, the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected in step S7503. After turning on the detection flag, the process proceeds to step S7504. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, that is, if the type of the jackpot state has already been determined, the process directly proceeds to step S7504.

In the following step S7504, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S7505, the value of the ball jam counter as the second counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401 is added by 1. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7501, it is determined in step S7506 whether or not the 7R early detection switch 754 has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7506, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7506, it is determined in step S7507 whether or not any of the 15R jackpot flag, the 7R jackpot flag, and the 3R jackpot flag is set to ON.

If a negative determination is made in step S7507, the 7R early detection flag indicating that the 7R early detection switch 754 has been detected is turned on in step S7508, and then the process proceeds to step S7504. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7507, the process directly proceeds to step S7504. As described above, in step S7504, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S7505, the value of the ball jam counter is added by 1, and then this process ends.

Next, the type entry process in step S310 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7602, the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is 15 rounds is turned on in step S7603.

After that, in step S7604, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7602, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7605, the 7R jackpot flag indicating that the 7R jackpot is set is turned on in step S7606. After that, in step S7607, the value of the ball clogging counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7605, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7608, the 3R jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is 3 rounds is turned on in step S7609. After that, in step S7607 described above, the value of the ball clogging counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and in step S401, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt process is performed. finish.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state. Wait processing is executed for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S111 in order to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, in the following step S104, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so that the process proceeds to step S111 in this case as well. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power interruption. That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process proceeds to step S111 in this case as well.

In the process of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262 and the payout control device 311 which are the control devices on the sub side. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112 or the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112 or the like). Further, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112 or the like) in the same manner. That is, in step S112, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step S113, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. In addition, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of power failure restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power off is restored, and in step S108, the power off occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted, and in step S110, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

After that, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S212 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43, the second start winning device 33b, etc. updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is sent to each of the sub-sides. Executes external output processing such as sending to the control device.

For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command or the like is transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command is a command output to the sub control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect according to the display performed by the special display device 43, and is a command in the present embodiment. Corresponds to information. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command or the like determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command, and displays the variation mode so as to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Give an instruction to the control device 45.

In step S202, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the following step S204, the accessory jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body unit 410 and is detected by the special entry detection switch 461. Settings etc. are made. The details of this accessory jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the special display device 43 is set as to what kind of control is performed by the special display device 43, and the jackpot determination and the setting of the effect pattern of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Will be. The details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step S206, the variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when the jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the blade member opening / closing process is executed. In this process, the control content of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) is set. The details of the blade member opening / closing process will be described later.

In step S208, the second display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of control is performed in the ordinary symbol display device 41 is set, such as setting the control content of the ordinary symbol display device 41. The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step S209, the trigger response unit control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the start winning device 33 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the start winning device 33. The details of the trigger response unit control process will be described later.

In step S210, the remaining ball monitoring process is executed. In this process, a process of confirming whether or not the game ball exists in the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is performed. The details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

In step S211 the advance effect process is executed. In this process, after the right to generate a jackpot state is given by the game ball that has entered the central winning unit 37, the jackpot type is determined, and the deterioration of the game tempo due to the time lag until the jackpot state starts is deteriorated. A process for suppressing is performed. The details of the preceding effect processing will be described later.

In step S212, the accessory drive process is performed. In this process, the rotating body unit 410, the slide unit 721, and the type sorting device 741 of the central winning unit 37 are operated. That is, for the rotating body unit 410, the rotating body 414 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction at a constant speed in a plan view, and for the slide unit 721, the slide member 722 is slid left and right at a predetermined rhythm (reciprocating operation). The type sorting device 741 is controlled to rotate the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 counterclockwise in a predetermined rhythm in front view.

After that, in step S213, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S214, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (the present embodiment). Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has passed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S215 to update the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0. Then, after the process, the process proceeds to step S213. That is, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing at the time of determination in step S214, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S212 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time.

If the power outage occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processes after step S216 are performed as the power outage process when the power is turned off. Be struck. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S216, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S217, and the value of the stack pointer is backed up in the backup area 503a in step S218. Remember in. After that, in step S219, a power off notification command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S220 and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S221, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

The process of step S213 is a timing at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in steps S201 to S212, or at the end of one cycle of the process of step S215 performed within the remaining time. Is running on. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than that in the case where each processing is in progress. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power is cut off can be reliably stored. ..

Next, the accessory jackpot setting process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag (see the special winning process of FIG. 18) indicating that the game ball has been detected by the special winning ball detection switch 461 is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502 and the special winning flag is turned off.

In the following step 1503, it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, "15" is set in the round number counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state. Further, in step S1505, the jackpot middle flag indicating that the jackpot state is being set is turned on, and in step S1506, the first variable flag indicating that the variable winning device 32 is being opened / closed is set to be turned on. In addition, in step S1507, the first variable timer used for opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 is set to "7500", and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to "8", and then this process is terminated. To do.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the 7R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735 is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the round number counter is set to "7" in step S1510.

After step S1510, in step S1511, it is determined whether or not the preceding opening effect described in detail will be performed. The opening effect is an effect that is performed at the beginning of the jackpot state to announce the start of the jackpot state (and to excite). On the other hand, in the preceding opening effect, the game ball that has entered the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745 has not yet been detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736 or the 7R entry detection switch 735. Despite the state, it is certain that such a game ball will be detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and the corresponding jackpot state will be given. A pseudo effect that imitates the opening effect derived for the purpose of teaching that the corresponding jackpot state occurs when the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 is detected. Is. In the present embodiment, although the preceding opening effect is not performed during the period of the jackpot state, substantially the same mode as the opening effect (display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42, voice mode, lighting mode of various lamps) is derived. It is configured as follows.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1511, in step S1512, a setting is made to execute the jackpot state of the 3R jackpot (or 7R jackpot) in the "shortening pattern". As will be described in detail later, there are a normal pattern in which the opening period for performing the opening effect is set and a shortened pattern in which the opening period is omitted in the jackpot state of the 3R jackpot or the 7R jackpot. Therefore, when the preceding opening effect is performed, instead, a pattern that omits the opening effect in the jackpot state is selected to prevent the opening effect from becoming too long.

After step S1512, or when a negative determination is made in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1505 described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not the 3R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736 is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, "3" is set in the round number counter in step S1514. After that, the process proceeds to step S1511 described above.

Next, the first display control process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, the jackpot middle flag is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if a jackpot state is in progress, this process is terminated as it is. That is, in the jackpot state, the variable display is not newly started.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the special winning flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the special entry detection switch 461 is on. The special winning flag is set to be turned on when the special winning detection switch 461 is detected (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and is turned off when the jackpot middle flag is turned on (the accessory described later). See step S1502 of the jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the opening fluctuation flag is set to ON. The variable flag during opening enters the specific area 401 when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position based on the small hit and the central winning unit 37 is in the open state (the specific area 401 is open). The ball is still present in the specific area 401, and is turned on when the special winning flag is turned on or not in the jackpot state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in the state where the central winning unit 37 is in the open state, the variable display of the special display device 43 is not performed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, in step S804, the setting status of the first display flag is observed, and it is determined whether or not the special display device 43 is performing variable display. When the first display flag is set to on, it is considered that the variable display is in progress, and when the first display flag is off, it is considered that the variable display is not performed. As will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when the variable display of the special display device 43 is started (see step S808), and when the variable display of the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed (see step S808). It is turned off in step S812).

Then, when a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, a jackpot state, a state in which the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, a variable display of the special display device 43, and a central winning unit If it is not in any of the open states of 37, the process proceeds to step S805, and the value of the hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by the entry into the start winning devices 33a and 33b is greater than 0. Determine if it is large or not. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no variation display is held and stored, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if even one variation display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter Na in step S806.

In the following step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the special fluctuation holding area is executed. This shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the special variable hold area in order to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → execution area and hold 2nd area → hold. The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on hold → the third area on hold. In the shift process, not only the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2, but also the jackpot generation flag, the deviation flag, the long small hit generation flag, the short small hit generation flag, the short small hit generation flag, the 2 second fluctuation flag, and the 3 seconds. The setting state of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag on / off is also shifted.

In the following step S808, the variable display setting process is performed. Here, the details of the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation information corresponds to the "big hit" by determining whether or not the jackpot generation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON. As a modification, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is the value corresponding to the jackpot by referring to the winning / failing judgment table again in the same manner as the winning / failing judgment processing of the start winning process. It may be determined whether or not it is "0".

If an affirmative decision is made in step S901, that is, if a "big hit" is won in the winning / failing lottery, a direct hit indicating that the "big hit" was won in the winning / failing lottery ("direct hit jackpot") in step S902. Turn on the jackpot flag. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON.

If affirmative determination is made in step S903, in step S904, a fluctuation pattern command for determining a fluctuation pattern (big hit fluctuation pattern) to be a jackpot and further transmitting the fluctuation pattern (variation information) to the sub control device 262. Set. In the following step S905, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. .. After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S903, in step S906, a fluctuation pattern (big hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and becomes a big hit is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined by the sub control device. The fluctuation pattern command is set so that it can be transmitted to 262 as well. In the following step S907, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S908 whether or not it is "out of alignment" by determining whether or not the deviation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON. As a modification, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1" by determining whether or not the value is "1" in the same manner as the winning / failing determination process of the start winning process. It may be determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is "off", it is determined in step S909 whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation hold area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, in step S910, a variation pattern command to be deviated is determined, and a variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub control device 262. I do. After that, in step S911, the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer, and then the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a fluctuation pattern (disengagement shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and becomes an deviation is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined by the sub control device. The fluctuation pattern command is set so that it can be transmitted to 262 as well. In the following step S913, the value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer used for the fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is a "small hit", the blade release flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether or not the long small hit generation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is on. As a modified example, in the same manner as the winning / failing determination process of the start winning process, it is determined once again whether or not the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any of "2 to 21". It may be determined whether or not the player has won the "long small hit".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "long small hit", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S916, in step S917, a variation pattern (long small hit 3 seconds) in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the variation display for 3 seconds is performed by the special display device 43. The variation pattern) is determined, and the variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S918, the value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S919, "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set for the open / close control timer used for opening / closing control of the blade member 404. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 3 seconds. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S916, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, a fluctuation pattern (long small hit 2 seconds) in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the fluctuation display for 2 seconds is performed by the special display device 43. The variation pattern) is determined, and the variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S923, "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the fluctuation display for 2 seconds is performed by the special display device 43. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, a fluctuation pattern (long small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time to result in a long small hit is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information). Is set to the fluctuation pattern command so as to be transmitted to the sub control device 262 as well.

In the following step S925, the value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S926, "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 0.1 second. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "short small hit", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S927, in step S928, the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the variation display for 3 seconds is performed by the special display device 43 (short small hit 3 seconds). The variation pattern) is determined, and the variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S929, the value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S930, "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set for the open / close control timer used for opening / closing control of the blade member 404. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 3 seconds. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S927, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S931, in step S932, a variation pattern (short small hit 2 seconds) in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the variation display for 2 seconds is performed by the special display device 43. The variation pattern) is determined, and the variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S933, the value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S934, "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the fluctuation display for 2 seconds is performed by the special display device 43. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a fluctuation pattern (short small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time to result in a short small hit is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information). Is set to the fluctuation pattern command so as to be transmitted to the sub control device 262 as well.

In the following step S936, the value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S937, "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 0.1 second. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag indicating that the special display device 43 is performing variable display is turned on. After step S938, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 23, when the affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, when the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S809 to perform the first display timer subtraction process. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S810, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the first display timer after the subtraction. At this time, step S810 is positively determined when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S810, in step S811, a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the special display device 43 is performed, and this process is terminated. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the combination of the lamps to be turned on is set to be sequentially switched. As a result, the switching display (variable display) of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S810, that is, when the stop timing of the variation display in the special display device 43 is reached, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the following step S813, the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display device 43 is performed. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the stop display is to be displayed is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a "big hit", the plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are stopped and displayed (for example, lit only for a few seconds) in a mode (combination) corresponding to the "big hit", and the lamp is "off". In the case, the stop display is displayed in the mode corresponding to "off", in the case of "long small hit", the stop display is displayed in the mode corresponding to "long small hit", and in the case of "short small hit". Stop display in a mode corresponding to "short small hit".

In the following step S814, the discrimination information setting process is performed. The details of the discrimination information setting process will be described later. After step S814, this process ends.

Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit jackpot flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the winning / failing lottery, the jackpot setting after step S1002 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1002, the jackpot flag indicating whether or not the jackpot state as the special game state is being set is turned on.

In the following step S1003, the first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is in the open state is turned on. In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is opened when the first variable flag is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S1004, the first variable timer, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 and indicates whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of opening, is set. In this example, "7500" corresponding to 30 seconds is set as a value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time per round (the maximum time that the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) becomes 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter indicating the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the special prize state occurs, that is, the number of times the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is executed) is set. Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as a value corresponding to the "direct hit jackpot".

In the following step S1006, a winning counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the variable winning device 32 is set, and then this process ends. In this example, "8" indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is set as a value. In the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), it is determined from the detection information of the count switch 223 whether or not the ball has entered the variable winning device 32, and it is said that the variable winning device 32 has entered the ball. If it is determined, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1.

Further, in step S1001, when it is determined that the jackpot does not correspond to the jackpot, that is, it is out of order, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation number counter is set. The fluctuation number counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In the present embodiment, the time reduction mode is until the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43 after the jackpot state ends, and "4" is set as the counter value after the jackpot ends as will be described later. ..

Here, when the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is "0", the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the fluctuation count counter is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is considered that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1. Move to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display this time is the fourth fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot (after the time reduction mode is given). Here, if the value of the fluctuation count counter is "0", the process of turning off the time reduction mode flag is performed in step S1010, the process of turning on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is not "0", this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1201, the jackpot hit flag is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is hit. If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is.

If affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1202. In the following step S1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1204, and whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, the step. In S1204, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, is left.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205, and whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0", that is, the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 is per round. It is determined whether or not the specified number (8 in this example) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (timing at the end of the round) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206, and whether or not the counter value of the round number counter is "0", that is, the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened). ) Has reached the specified number of times.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the end setting process is performed in step S1207 to end this process. The details of the end setting process will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number of times, the round feed process is performed in step S1208, and this process ends. In the round feed process, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1. That is, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeated until the number of executed rounds reaches a preset predetermined number of times. Further, in the round feed process, the first variable flag is turned off, and the wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set in the first variable timer.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, during the interval period between rounds, the process proceeds to step S1209 to determine whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, when the interval period ends and the timing to start the next round is reached, the round start process is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round (“7500” in this example) is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter is set. Set the maximum number of winnings per round ("8" in this example). If a negative determination is made in step S1209 and the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Based on the on / off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal indicating that the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is opened is output, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal indicating that the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is closed is output, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

Here, the end setting process of step S1207 will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot middle flag is turned off. Then, in step S1303, the time reduction mode flag is turned on. That is, in the present embodiment, the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state of all the jackpot types of "direct hit jackpot", "15 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "3 round jackpot" is completed. It is configured as follows.

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off. After that, in step S1305, the fluctuation number counter is set to "4", and then the process proceeds to step S1306. That is, after the jackpot ends, the time reduction mode is set until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, a process of turning off various jackpot flags is performed. After step S1306, this process ends.

Next, the blade member opening / closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade release flag (see step S908 of the variation display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the opening flag indicating that the blade member 404 is being opened is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the blade member 404 is to be opened from now on by winning a "small hit", the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the open / close control timer is “0”. As described above, when it is determined that the "small hit" is won in the variation display setting process, it corresponds to the same time as the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 for the open / close control timer. The value to be set is set (see step S913, step S916, step S920, and step S923). Therefore, at the same time as the end of the corresponding variation display, a positive determination is made in the determination.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the open / close control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1804, and this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, when the timing to open the blade member 404 has arrived, the opening flag is turned on in step S1805, and the blade member 404 is opened in step S1806. Perform the process to make it.

After that, in step S1807, it is determined whether or not the long small hit generation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, a value "375" corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set for the open / close control timer in step S1808. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1807, a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the open / close control timer in step S1809. After step S1808 and step S1809, this process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the open / close control timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1810, the value of the open / close control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1811, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, when the timing for closing the blade member 404 has arrived, the opening flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade opening flag is turned off in step S1813. In step S1814, the process of closing the blade member 404 is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the second display control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, whether or not switching display (variation display) is being performed by the normal symbol display device 41 by observing the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying fluctuations. To determine. Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying fluctuations, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 changes. It is considered that the stop display is in progress, which corresponds to the state in which the display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if the fluctuation display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc> 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area.

After that, in step S2105, the start setting process is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) is satisfied. Specifically, the second display timer is turned on and the second display timer is set. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol display device 41 is different between the time reduction mode in which the ball is in a high ball entry state and the normal mode, and in the time reduction mode, it is 0 with respect to the second display timer. A value "125" corresponding to .5 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value "2500" corresponding to 15 seconds is set for the second display timer. In the jackpot state, "2500" is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the setting in the start setting process, the normal symbol display is displayed. The switching display is started in the device 41. Then, after the end of step S2105, the second display control process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when the fluctuation display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform the second display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and the normal symbol stop display setting for displaying the stop on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the normal symbol display device 41 is stopped is output in the external output process in the next normal process.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is achieved based on the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the ordinary fluctuation holding area. Specifically, "1 to 8" out of the numerical values 0 to 9 of the ordinary symbol random number counter C3 is the winning value.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the normal symbol discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process is completed. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening / closing the start winning device 33 is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning device 33b, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening start. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is different between the time reduction mode in which the ball is in a high ball-entry state and the normal mode, and in the time reduction mode, the second variable timer is used. On the other hand, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value "100" corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer. In the jackpot state, "100" is set for the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the ordinary symbol display device 41 is configured to light and display "○" or "-" as a normal symbol, and if the current lighting is "○", "-" or "-" If so, it is switched to "○" and displayed. As a result, the timing of the second display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms.

Next, the trigger response unit control process in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the second start winning device 33b (opening and closing member 33c) is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is considered that the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is subtracted by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, step S2203 is positively determined when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes “0”. If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, the end setting process is performed in step S2204, and then this process ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Based on the on / off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the second start winning device 33b in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a drive signal to open the opening / closing member 33c is output to the second start winning device 33b (solenoid that drives it), and the second start winning device 33b is opened. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal to close the opening / closing member 33c is output to the second start winning device 33b, and the second starting winning device 33b is closed.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process in step S210 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. First, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is "0".

As described above, the "ball entry counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the ball entry count switch 437, and the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 3R early detection switch 753, and , 7R 1 is subtracted based on the detection of the early detection switch 754. Further, the "ball jam counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, and is based on the detection of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 and the 7R ball entry detection switch 735. Is subtracted by 1. That is, the ball entry counter of the present embodiment is located on the downstream side of the ball entry count switch 437 and from the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 in the specific area 401. Is also configured to count the number of game balls in the upstream range.

If a negative determination is made in step S7101, in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer for determining whether or not the specified time has elapsed since the game ball last entered the specific area 401 is set to ". It is determined whether or not it is "0". In the present embodiment, "10000" is set in the monitoring timer when the ball enters the specific area 401. Therefore, the monitoring timer becomes "0" 40 seconds after the last ball enters the specific area 401. Further, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball enters the specific area 401 to when it is discharged, more specifically, after the game ball is detected by the entry count switch 437, the game ball is not. It takes about 8 to 30 seconds to be detected by the special ball entry detection switch 462, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, or the 3R ball entry detection switch 736.

If a negative determination is made in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 in step S7103, and then this process ends. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7102, that is, even if the time assumed as the time from when the game ball enters the specific area 401 to when it is discharged is significantly elapsed, the ball entry counter (or described later). If the value of the ball clogging counter) is not "0" and it is considered that the ball clogging has occurred in the specific area 401, the error notification process is performed in step S7104. Specifically, for example, an error lamp is turned on, an error notification sound is output, and control such as prohibiting the firing of a game ball is performed. After that, this process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, in step S7105, a ball that specifies the number of game balls existing in the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 provided in the specific area 401 (type lottery area 408). It is determined whether or not the value of the clogging counter is "0". As described above, the "ball jam counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 and the 7R ball entry detection switch. It is subtracted by 1 based on the detection of 735. That is, the ball clogging counter of the present embodiment has the 3R guidance passage 743 and the 7R early detection switch 754 on the downstream side of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the upstream side of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 in the specific area 401. It is configured to count the number of game balls existing in the 7R guide passage 745 on the downstream side and on the upstream side of the 7R ball entry detection switch 735.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7105, that is, if it is determined that no game ball remains in the specific area 401, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7105, the process proceeds to step S7102 described above.

Next, the preceding effect processing in step S211 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. First, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not the 3R early detection flag indicating that the 3R early detection switch 753 has been detected is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7701, it is determined in step S7702 whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is 0.

When affirmatively determined in step S7702, that is, in the specific area 401, the ball has not yet entered the out passage 428, the 15R entry port 731, the 3R guide passage 743, and the 7R guide passage 745, but has entered the ball. If there is no game ball that may be played, in step S7703, whether or not the value of the ball clogging counter is 1, that is, the specific area 401 is currently detected by the 3R early detection switch 753. It is determined whether or not there is only a game ball. When a negative determination is made in step S7703, that is, when a game ball exists in the specific area 401 other than the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 (in the specific area 401, downstream of the 3R early detection switch 753). Two or more game balls on the side and in the area upstream of the 3R entry detection switch 736 and in the area downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R entry detection switch 735. When an error state occurs in which it is determined that the game ball does not exist in the specific area 401 even though the game ball exists or is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 in the specific area 401. ), This process ends as it is. If it is determined that the game ball does not exist in the specific area 401, error processing may be performed.

The time required from the detection of the game ball by the 3R early detection switch 753 to the detection by the 3R entry detection switch 736 is approximately 8 seconds, and the game ball is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754. Therefore, the time required for the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 to be detected is approximately 4 seconds.

Further, the time required from the detection of the game ball by the entry count switch 437 to the detection by the 15R entry detection switch 734 is approximately 17 to 22 seconds, and the game ball is set to the entry count switch 437. The time required from the detection to the detection by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 is approximately 22 seconds to 26 seconds, and after the game ball is detected by the ball entry count switch 437, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 The time required for the switch to be detected is approximately 26 to 30 seconds.

That is, if the game ball does not exist in the specific area 401 when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736. There is no possibility that another game ball will be detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S7703, that is, when the game ball existing in the specific area 401 is only one ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, in step S7704, the sub-control device 262 is contacted. A process of setting a 3R advance opening command for deriving the opening effect corresponding to the "3 round jackpot" prior to the start of the jackpot state is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, if there is no other game ball in the specific area 401 when the game ball enters the 3R guidance passage 743, the occurrence of a three-round jackpot is certain, but the game ball is It takes about 8 seconds from the detection by the 3R early detection switch 753 to the detection by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 (and the 3R guide passage 743 and 7R guide passage 745 are relatively difficult to see due to the covering cover 756. ing). For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable that the jackpot state of three rounds is surely generated, but the jackpot state is not easily started. Therefore, in step S7704, when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, the opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot state is derived to dispel such concern.

The jackpot state is an opening period for teaching the start of the jackpot state and a period during which the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the variable winning device 32 operates between the round period set a plurality of times and the round period. There is an interval period, which is a closed state, and an ending period, which teaches the end of the jackpot state. In the opening period, an opening effect is performed.

The sub-control device 262 that has received the 3R preceding opening command performs processing for deriving the opening effect corresponding to the "three-round jackpot", but does not start the jackpot state of the three rounds, and is just a jackpot. It only derives an effect (meaning no opening period, in that respect, a pseudo-opening effect) to teach the start of the state. The jackpot state of 3 rounds is started when the game ball is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736.

Further, the opening effect derived based on the reception of the 3R advance opening command (hereinafter referred to as "advance opening effect") is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 and then detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736. It connects the time until the jackpot state starts, and the derivation time is not constant (because it depends on the moving speed of the game ball and the like). That is, the estimated time from when the game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 to when it is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is about 8 seconds. On the other hand, in the preceding opening effect corresponding to the 3R jackpot, a series of effect modes (video; in this example, almost the same as the opening effect) are derived in the first half part (for example, 0 seconds to 7 seconds), and the second half part. (For example, after 7 seconds), a short production mode is repeatedly derived so that no discomfort will occur in connection with the production during the subsequent round period at any time (loop movie, still image as a modified example). Is derived.

Further, for the 3-round jackpot and the 7-round jackpot, a normal pattern (first opening pattern) in which an opening period is provided and a shortened pattern (second opening pattern) in which the opening period is omitted are set. .. In the present embodiment, the shortening pattern is selected when the preceding opening effect is derived. For example, the first opening pattern of the 3-round jackpot and the 7-round jackpot is set to "7 seconds", and a series of moving images are derived. The second opening pattern of the 3-round jackpot is set to "0 seconds". The second opening pattern of the 7-round jackpot is set to "3 seconds", and a loop movie following the opening effect derived based on the reception of the 7R preceding opening command described later is derived.

After step S7704, in step S7705, the 3R early detection flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S7702, that is, a game in which the ball has not yet entered any of the out passage 428, the 15R entry port 731, the 3R guide passage 743, and the 7R guide passage 745 in the specific area 401. If a ball is present (soon there is a game ball that may enter either the 15R entry port 731, the 3R guide passage 743, or the 7R guide passage 745), the sub in step S7706. For the control device 262, issue a promotion reception display command to derive a promotion reception display that means "3R jackpot is scheduled to occur, but it may be changed to a more advantageous jackpot." Set.

That is, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408, the preceding game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743, and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, the preceding game ball May be detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 before the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 detects the subsequent game ball, so when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected. Promotion acceptance display indicating that promotion is being accepted (promotion acceptance status) such that a better jackpot may occur instead of performing the advance opening effect that 3R jackpot will occur Is to be derived.

As a result, it is possible to perform an effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like at the stage when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, and after the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, a predetermined round ball entry detection switch. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a relatively long time lag occurs without any particular reaction corresponding to the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 until the detection of 734, 735, and 736 is performed. After step S7706, in step S7705, the 3R early detection flag is turned off, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the function of deriving the promotion reception display to the decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes the promotion reception state teaching means. In addition, the function of deriving the promotion reception display and the preceding opening effect constitutes an early teaching means.

If a negative determination is made in step S7701, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not the 7R early detection flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7707, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7707, it is determined in step S7708 whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is 0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7708, it is determined in step S7709 whether or not the value of the ball clogging counter is 1. When the affirmative determination is made in step S7709, that is, when the game ball existing in the specific area 401 is only one ball detected by the 7R early detection switch 754, in step S7710, the sub-control device 262 is contacted. A process of setting a 7R preceding opening command for deriving the opening effect corresponding to the "7 round jackpot" prior to the start of the jackpot state is performed. After step S7710, in step S7711, the 7R early detection flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

The opening effect derived based on the reception of the 7R preceding opening command connects from the detection by the 7R early detection switch 754 to the detection by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 and the start of the jackpot state. However, the derivation time is not constant (because it depends on the moving speed of the game ball and the like). That is, the estimated time from when the game ball is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 to when it is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 is about 5 seconds. On the other hand, in the preceding opening effect corresponding to the 7R jackpot, a series of effect modes (video; in this example, almost the same as the opening effect) are derived in the first half part (for example, 0 seconds to 4 seconds), and the second half part. (For example, after 4 seconds), a production mode (still image is also acceptable) is derived in which a short production mode (video) is repeatedly derived so that a feeling of strangeness does not occur in connection with the production during the subsequent round period at any time. To.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S7709, that is, when a game ball exists in the specific area 401 other than the game ball detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 (from the 3R early detection switch 753 of the specific area 401). 2 game balls in the area downstream of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 and the area downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R ball entry detection switch 735. An error state has occurred in which it is determined that there is no game ball in the specific area 401 even though there are two or more game balls or the game ball detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 exists in the specific area 401. In the case), step S7710 is skipped, the process proceeds to step S7711, the 7R early detection flag is turned off, and then this process ends. If it is determined that the game ball does not exist in the specific area 401, error processing may be performed.

In addition, if a negative judgment is made in step S7708, in step S7712, the sub-control device 262 is told that "7R jackpot is scheduled to occur, but it may be changed to a more advantageous jackpot." Set the promotion reception display command to derive the promotion reception display with the meaning such as. After that, the 7R early detection flag is turned off in step S7711, and then this process ends.

It should be noted that the processes of step S7702, step S7703, step S7708, and step S7709 constitute the uncertain element determination process, and based on the process of setting the preceding opening command of step S7704 and step S7710 and the reception of the preceding opening command. The process of deriving the preceding opening effect constitutes the preceding opening process.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 33, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the payout control device 311 temporarily waits for another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the receive interrupt process is executed. When the receive interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3001 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in order to store the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3002. Turn on the command reception flag to end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, it is shown in FIG. 35. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command has been received, the process may be shifted to the command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First of all, in step S3101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in the following step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, the external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, does the RAM determination value match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off? Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the initialization process of RAM 513 after step S3115 is performed. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the processing at the time of power restoration (at the time of power failure recovery). Process) is executed. That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored, in step S3110, the power cut occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of the prize ball is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is enabled in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set, the power supply is cut off, so that the processes after step S3123 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination processing described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127, and the backup area 513a is calculated. The RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In the process of step S3122, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is larger than that in the case where each process is in the middle. It is less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, in step S3201, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the determination processing of the command is performed.

Here, the command determination process in step S3201 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 33).

If the command reception flag is determined to be off in step S3301, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of the command read from the RAM 513 in the processes of steps S3304 to S3306 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is a prize ball command. Whether or not it is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main controller is turned on when the power is turned on. Since the control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the initialization timing being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be surely set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, the command determination process ends without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, the prize balls will not be paid out if they remain. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being inflicted with a loss.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to allow the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the number of prize balls received in step S3310 is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , The payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of the prize ball. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command instructing the payout of the prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out at an early stage for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command judgment process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the flow chart of FIG. 35 will be returned to the description. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this process ends as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state is determined when the state return operation is started. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, the payout motor is clogged with balls, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state). ..

After that, in step S3205, the lower plate full state or the lower plate full release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, the setting of the lower plate full state is executed when the lower plate is full, and the lower plate is not full when the lower plate is not full. Perform state setting. Further, in step S3206, the setting of the tank ball-less state (ball out state) or the tank ball-less release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, and the setting of the state without a tank ball and the state without a tank ball is executed. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is made.

Subsequently, the payout control process of the prize ball and the rental ball is executed. Specifically, the payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal operation is not started and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibe motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a jammed state. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

In the following step S3903, the hold information storage process for storing the fluctuation information included in the starting command in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 is performed. In addition, as described above, the starting command includes information indicating whether or not the variation display is triggered by the entry of the first start winning device 33a (setting of the first start winning flag), and the variation information corresponding to the jackpot. Information indicating whether there is (setting of big hit generation flag), information indicating whether it is a variable display corresponding to long small hit or short small hit (setting of long small hit generation flag or short small hit generation flag), corresponding to omission Information indicating whether or not the fluctuation display is performed (setting of the off flag), information indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (2-second fluctuation flag, 3-second fluctuation flag, 7-second fluctuation flag, 0.1-second flag setting) Is included.

Further, the hold information storage area includes four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas) and one execution area, similarly to the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. In the hold information storage area, the change information included in the start command is stored in chronological order according to the reception history of the start command based on the change display (information stored in the special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261 can be grasped by the sub control device 262 as well.

Here, the hold information storage process in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG. 38.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, the hold counter Np that counts the number of hold of variable information held and stored in the hold information storage area is incremented by one.

In the following step S4103, the fluctuation information including the information on whether or not it is a big hit, the information on whether or not it is a small hit, the information on the fluctuation time, etc. included in the starting command is the first of the vacant hold areas in the hold information storage area. Store in the area. After that, in step S4104, the values of various counters used for determining the effect display content are acquired, and the values are stored in the same holding area where the fluctuation information is stored.

After the processing of step S4104, or when a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4105, and whether or not a variation pattern command is received (whether the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). Whether or not) is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4105, the value of the hold counter Np is subtracted by 1 in step S4106.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth hold areas of the hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is the first hold area → the execution area. , 2nd hold area → 1st hold area, 3rd hold area → 2nd hold area, 4th hold area → 3rd hold area, and so on.

After performing the process of step S4107, or when a negative determination is made in step S4205, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, if a negative determination is made after step S3903 or in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3911.

In step S3905, various counter update processes used for determining the effect display content are executed. In the following step S3906, the display setting process is performed. Here, basically, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 when the variation pattern command is received. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined here, and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation time timer. At this time, the sub control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates various production types (variation types) with fluctuation pattern commands.

Further, in step S3906, it is also confirmed whether or not the effect button 125 is operated, and if the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, the setting is made accordingly. Further, in the present embodiment, when "100" is set in the fluctuation count counter in the end setting process or when the value of the fluctuation counter is subtracted by 1 in the discrimination information setting process, a command including that fact is mainly used. It is output from the control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 is configured to display the remaining number of times on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command information.

The display command is, for example, a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of the variable display, or a command for designating a display effect during a jackpot, and is information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. The required display command is generated each time based on. Normally, the display commands related to the fluctuation display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly classified into a normal fluctuation data group and a reach effect data group, and basically each data constituting these data groups is the above-mentioned fluctuation time timer. By sequentially outputting in accordance with a predetermined time order based on the above, display effects according to various fluctuation patterns are performed. For example, the normal fluctuation data group consists of normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2, ..., Normal fluctuation data m, and the reach effect data group consists of reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2, ..., Reach effect data. When it consists of n, the data is output in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 → ... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and subsequently, with the start of reach production, reach production data 1 → 2 → ... → Data is output in the order of n.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variable display of the symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the sub-control is performed until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses (until the fluctuation time timer set in step S3906 becomes 0). The effect display is continued in cooperation with the device 262 and the display control device 45.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the voice setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3908.

In step S3909, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state where the display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 is not performed in the decorative symbol display device 42). Perform other processing such as control settings for screen display).

In step 3910, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents of steps S3905 to 3909 to each device is executed. For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 is made to perform a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3910 performed every 1 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3911 and whether or not the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. To determine. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

If the power failure occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3912, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the power cutoff occurrence information is stored, the power cutoff process is executed in step S3913. In the power off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted. After executing the power off processing, the processing loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the central winning unit 37 has a normal passage 701 that guides a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the most upstream portion of the winning / losing lottery area 407, and a specific area 401. There is a special passage 702 that guides the game ball that has entered the ball to the middle part of the winning / failing lottery area 407, and the game ball that has passed through the special passage 702 is a slide unit 721 that determines whether or not the game ball is dropped into the out passage 428. It is possible to avoid the distribution by. Therefore, in the special passage 702, as compared with the normal passage 701, the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 enters the passage in which the ball has a high possibility of reaching the rotating body 414, and by extension, enters the special pocket portion 416a. It is a passage with a high possibility of reaching the safe passage 427 in which the ball entry detection switch 461 is installed (high expectation of big hit).

Further, a branch point between the normal guide unit 704 that guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the normal passage 701 and the special guide unit 705 that guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the special passage 702. 703 is provided with a route distribution device 703. The route distribution device 703 of the present embodiment has a shaft portion 713 rotatably supported around a shaft pin 711 extending in the front-rear direction, and a reference posture in an equilibrium state from the shaft portion 713 to the left side. A first wing portion 714 projecting toward the right side and a second wing portion 715 projecting toward the right side from the shaft portion 713 are provided.

Then, when the game balls are guided one by one to the route distribution device 703 and the game balls fall to the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715, the route distribution device 703 is based on the weight of the game balls. Rotates to the left or right. The guide surfaces 714a and 715a (upper surface) of the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution device 703 in the rotating posture are configured to communicate with the normal guide portion 704. The game ball that has fallen on the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715 is guided by the normal guide portion 704, and eventually by the normal passage 701.

On the other hand, a pair of left and right introduction passages 718 (a pair of left and right introduction passages 718), such as a game ball entering a pair of left and right entry passages 403 (first entry opening 403a, second entry 403b) at almost the same time. Two game balls are simultaneously guided to the route distribution device 703 from the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b), and the two game balls fall to the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 at the same time. In this case, the weight on the side of the first wing portion 714 and the weight on the side of the second wing portion 715 are balanced, so that the reference posture of the route distribution device 703 is maintained. The guide surfaces 714a and 715a (upper surface) of the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution device 703 in the reference posture are configured to communicate with the pair of left and right special guide portions 705, respectively. The game balls that have fallen on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 are both guided by the special guide portion 705, and eventually to the special passage 702.

As a result, it is possible to match a plurality of game balls collectively entering the specific area 401 with increasing the expectation of entering the special pocket portion 416a. For this reason, since a plurality of game balls are collectively put into the specific area 401, the player's expectation that the game balls will be advantageous in putting the game balls into the special pocket portion 416a and the actual feeling of the player. It is possible to match that the expectation of entering the special pocket portion 416a is increased by guiding the plurality of game balls to the special passage 702. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which even if a plurality of game balls are collectively inserted into the specific area 401, the jackpot expectation is not contributed at all, or rather is lowered, and a plurality of game balls can be entered in the specific area 401. It is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the player's expectation that the jackpot expectation is improved by putting the game balls together.

Further, for example, in the route distribution device 703, as compared with the case where an elastic body such as a spring or rubber is used, it is possible to prevent a defect that occurs due to deterioration of the elastic body. Further, it is not necessary to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution device 703, and the configuration and control can be simplified and compacted. In addition, there is a suspicion that the player feels distrust compared to the configuration in which the switch and the driving means for detecting the game ball are used to switch the route depending on whether or not there are a plurality of game balls. It can be reduced and fairness can be appealed.

Further, a pair of ball entry openings 403 (first ball entry opening 403a, second ball entry opening 403b) are provided, and a game ball that has entered a specific area through the first ball entry opening 403a is provided. A game ball that has entered the specific area 401 via the first introduction passage 718a (dropped on the guide surface 714a of the first wing portion 714) to the first wing portion 714 and the second entry ball opening 403b. A second introduction passage 718b for guiding to the second wing portion 715 (dropping on the guide surface 715a of the second wing portion 715) is provided. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the game ball is brought into contact with the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 at the same time, and to set the position where the game ball is dropped to a suitable position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the plurality of game balls that have entered the specific area 401 are all guided to the special passage 702. Further, it is also possible to impart gameability such that the game ball is launched (aimed and desired) so that the game ball enters both the left and right entry ball openings 403a and 403b.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 through the safe passage 427, and then is outside the game area (specific area 401). It is configured to enter the type lottery area 408, which is a part of the specific area 401, instead of being discharged to. Then, a jackpot state such as whether the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 enters the 15R entry port 731, the 7R entry port 732, or the 3R entry port 733 provided in the type lottery area 408. An analog lottery (type lottery) is being held to determine the type of. Therefore, when the game balls continuously enter the two special pocket portions 416a of the rotating body 414, the jackpot state given is detected by the special entry detection switch 461 first among the continuously passed game balls. Although it is one time corresponding to the game ball that has been played, all of the plurality of game balls that have entered the special ball entry detection switch 461 almost continuously can be utilized in the subsequent type lottery.

Further, the time from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 until it is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, which triggers the occurrence of the "three round jackpot", the game ball enters the type lottery area 408. After that, it is configured to be longer than the time until it is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, which triggers the occurrence of the "7 round jackpot". In addition, the time from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 until it is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, which triggers the occurrence of the "7 round jackpot", is when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408. After that, it is configured to be longer than the time until it is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, which triggers the occurrence of the "15 round jackpot".

Therefore, for example, among a plurality of game balls that have continuously (continuously) entered the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, the preceding game ball heads toward the 3R entry port 733 (3R entry detection switch 736). Even when the subsequent game ball heads for the 15R entry port 731 (15R entry detection switch 734), the subsequent game ball first enters the 15R entry port 731 (to the 15R entry detection switch 734). It can be detected) to generate a 15-round jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the subsequent game ball can be utilized more reliably. As a result, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the player has lost or wasted the game ball continuously entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and it is also possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by the loss. Can be done.

Further, in the type lottery area 408, a 3R guide passage 743 that leads the game ball to the 3R entry port 733, a 7R guide passage 745 that leads the game ball to the 7R entry port 732, and a game ball 15R are entered. A 15R guide passage 746 leading to the ball mouth 731 is provided. Further, the first transfer plate 744 that distributes the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 to either the 3R guide passage 743 or the other guide passages 745 and 746, and the first transfer plate 744 3R guide passage 743. A second transfer plate 747 that distributes the game balls that have not been distributed to either the 7R guide passage 745 or the 15R guide passage 746 is provided. That is, although the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743 is arranged on the upstream side of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408 from the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745, the 3R guide passage 743 is the 7R guide. It is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the passage 745 (in the above example, the moving distance of the game ball is longer). Further, although the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745 is arranged on the upstream side of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408 from the entrance of the 15R guide passage 746, the 7R guide passage 745 is the 15R guide. It is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the passage 746.

Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is not guided to the 3R guide passage 743 by the first transfer plate 744 (it is not dropped by the "sieve" corresponding to the 3R guide passage 743), the game ball is said to be the same. When the game ball is guided to the second transfer plate 747 and is not guided to the 7R guide passage 745 by the second transfer plate 747 (it was not dropped by the "sieve" corresponding to the 7R guide passage 745). The game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746. That is, among the 3R guide passages 743, the 7R entry port 732, and the 15R guide passage 746, the passages that can be expected to generate a jackpot state that is more advantageous for the player, the more the entrance is downstream in the type lottery area 408. By arranging it on the side (so that the one that remains until the end gives a better result), you can expect excitement in the game. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the game balls are distributed in two stages in the type lottery area 408, such an action effect is more prominently exhibited.

Further, among the 3R guide passages 743, the 7R guide passages 745, and the 15R guide passages 746, the more favorable the passage to the jackpot state for the player, the more the entrance is the type lottery area. When adopting a configuration in which the game balls are arranged on the downstream side of the 408, for example, when the game balls continuously enter the two types of lottery areas 408, the preceding game balls move to the first pass plate 744 and the second pass. Even if the plate 747 guides the following game ball to the 15R guide passage 746 side, if the succeeding game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 side by the first transfer plate 744, the subsequent game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 side earlier. It reaches the passage 743.

In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the 3R guide passage 743 takes longer time for the game ball to pass than the 7R guide passage 745, and the 7R guide passage 745 has a game ball longer than the 15R guide passage 746. It is configured to take longer to pass. Therefore, for example, even though the preceding game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746 (7R guide passage 745), the subsequent game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745 (3R guide passage 745). Guided by 743), the succeeding game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745 (3R guide passage 743) before the preceding game ball enters the 15R guide passage 746 (7R guide passage 745). It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which a ball enters the ball and a 3-round jackpot or a 7-round jackpot (3 round jackpot) occurs.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when two game balls enter the specific area 401 at almost the same time, such as when the game balls enter the pair of left and right entry ball openings 403 at the same time, these game balls However, all of them are easily guided to the special passage 702, and as a result, there is a high possibility that a plurality of game balls continuously enter the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414. Therefore, in such a configuration, by adopting the above configuration in which it is not wasted that a plurality of game balls continuously enter the special pocket portion 416a, the special pocket portion 416a (by extension, the type lottery area 408) Even if a plurality of game balls enter the ball in succession, it is wasted or the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the interest caused by the loss is more effectively achieved.

Further, a 3R early detection switch 753 for detecting a game ball moving in the 3R guidance passage 743 and a 7R early detection switch 754 for detecting a game ball moving in the 7R guidance passage 745 are provided, and the 3R early detection switch 753 or , 7R early detection switch 754 is detected, in the specific area 401, on the downstream side of the ball entry count switch 437, 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, and 15R ball entry. Whether or not a game ball exists in an area upstream of the detection switch 734 (determination of whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is "0") is determined (see the preceding effect processing in FIG. 32). Here, when it is determined that the game ball does not exist in such an area, the area of the specific area 401 on the downstream side of the 3R early detection switch 753 and on the upstream side of the 3R ball entry detection switch. , And, whether or not the number of game balls existing in the area downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R ball entry detection switch is one (the value of the ball clogging counter is (Determination of whether or not it is 1) is performed. Here, when it is determined that there is only one, that is, it is determined that the game ball existing in the specific area 401 is only one detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754. In that case, it is configured to derive a preceding opening effect that imitates the opening effect that teaches the start of the jackpot state.

That is, although it is confirmed that the game ball that has entered the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745 will enter the 3R entrance passage 733 or the 7R entrance passage 732, the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745 Is configured so that the passage time of the game ball is longer than that of the 15R guide passage 746. Therefore, after the game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745, the 3R entry port 733 or the 7R entry port It is conceivable that a relatively long time lag will occur until the ball enters the 732 (until it is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735). In this case, for example, when the game ball enters the special pocket portion 416a in a single shot and further enters the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745, the corresponding 3R jackpot or 7R jackpot occurs at this point. Despite the fact that it has been decided (as a player, it is not a 15R jackpot, so it may be a little disappointing), it is relatively long before the game ball passes through the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745. It takes time, and it is possible that the jackpot state will not start easily.

In this regard, when a game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 installed in the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745, the game ball is the 3R entry detection switch 736 or There is a possibility that another game ball is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, or the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 before it is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735. If there is no such condition, the preceding opening effect indicating the occurrence of the 3R jackpot or the 7R jackpot is derived at that time, so that such concern can be dispelled. Therefore, it takes too much time (no reaction) between the time when the type of the jackpot state is determined to be the 3R jackpot or the 7R jackpot and the time when the jackpot state starts (there is no reaction), and the tempo of the game is bad. Therefore, it is possible to prevent situations such as a decrease in interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, when it is determined that only the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 exists in the specific area 401, the advance opening effect for the 3 round jackpot, Alternatively, it is configured to derive a preceding opening effect for a 7-round jackpot. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the mode of the preceding opening effect and the type of the jackpot state that actually occurs, while being configured so that the type of the jackpot state can be taught in the preceding opening effect. .. In addition, by configuring the preceding opening effect so that the type of the jackpot state can be taught, the effectability can be improved and the player can be given a sense of security.

Further, the jackpot state includes a normal pattern and a shortened pattern in which the opening period is omitted. When setting the jackpot state, if the preceding opening effect is derived, the shortened pattern is selected. Has been done. As a result, when the preceding opening effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the opening effect from becoming too long by further performing the opening effect having a normal length. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid problems such as deterioration of the tempo of the game.

In addition, the value is added based on the detection of the ball entry count switch 437, and the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, and 15R ball entry detection switch 734 are detected. The value is added based on the detection of the ball entry counter, the 3R early detection switch 753, and the 7R early detection switch 754, and the value is added based on the detection of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 and the 7R ball entry. A ball jam counter is provided in which a value is subtracted based on the detection of the detection switch 735. As a result, the number of game balls existing in the specific area 401 can be grasped, and it can be determined whether or not ball clogging has occurred, or in the specific area 401, the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection. It is possible to determine whether or not a game ball exists in addition to the game ball detected by the switch 754. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the playability and the effect. ..

Further, when the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 is detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is 0, and if it is determined that the value is not 0, the jackpot state is reached. The promotion reception display indicating that the promotion reception state has not yet been determined is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Therefore, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 and the preceding game ball enters the 3R guidance passage 743, it has been determined that a jackpot state of a three-round jackpot still occurs. The player is surely aware that there is a possibility that a 7-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot may occur unless the subsequent game ball enters the 3R guidance passage 743. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to have the player understand the game playability more reliably, and when the situation as in the above example occurs, the game ball continuously enters the behavior of the subsequent game ball and the type lottery area 408. You can get a stronger interest in such things.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the detection of the first ball entry count switch 437a provided in the first introduction passage 718a and the detection of the second ball entry count switch 437b provided in the second introduction passage 718b are performed at the same time. It is configured to derive different effects depending on whether it is performed or performed independently. Therefore, the player can recognize and enjoy the moment when the two game balls are simultaneously guided to the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution device 703.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is arranged so as to cover the front of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 (semi-transparent that reduces the visibility of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745). ) A covering cover 756 (see FIG. 4) is provided as a covering means. As a result, the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745. Therefore, the entrances of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 can be regarded as the entrances of the 3R entry port 731 and the 7R entry port 732. Therefore, basically, it is easier to understand the premise of playability that a "3R jackpot" or "7R jackpot" jackpot state occurs when the ball enters the entrances of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745. can do. Further, by visually recognizing the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 having a shape that delays the game ball, it is possible to prevent the design from being deteriorated and the type lottery area 408 from appearing complicated. Can be done.

The content is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(A) In the above embodiment, particularly regarding the configuration of the route distribution device 703 that distributes the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the normal passage 701 (normal guide unit 704) or the special passage 702 (special guide unit 705). It is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, the reference posture of the route distribution device 703 is a posture capable of guiding the game ball to the special passage 702, and the reference posture is maintained when the game ball is guided, so that the game ball is maintained. Is guided to the special passage 702, but the reference posture of the route distribution device 703 is a posture capable of guiding the game ball to the normal passage 701, and guides the game ball (contact with the game ball). The game ball may be guided to the special passage 702 by changing the posture so that the game ball can be guided to the special passage 702. Next, an example of the mode of the route distribution device will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44.

(A-1) The route distribution device 901 shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 has a base plate 902 attached to the front side of the game board 30 and a distribution plate 903 rotatably provided with respect to the base plate 902. I have. The distribution plate 903 includes a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 904 extending in the left-right direction, a plate-shaped front piece portion 905 projecting forward from the bearing portion 904, and a plate-shaped rear piece portion 906 projecting rearward from the bearing portion 904. And have. A columnar shaft pin 907 is inserted through the bearing portion 904, and both ends of the shaft pin 907 are attached to the base plate 902. As a result, the distribution plate 903 is rotatably attached to the base plate 902.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the shaft pin 907 and the bearing portion 904 extend in the horizontal direction, whereas the upper surface of the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905) is slightly inclined downward toward the left. And is extending. Further, as shown in FIG. 43, a weight portion 911 is provided on the rear piece portion 906 of the distribution plate 903, and the portion of the distribution plate 903 on the front side of the bearing portion 904 is more than the bearing portion 904. The rear part is heavier. The weight portion 911 may be integrally formed with the rear piece portion 906, or the weight portion 911 of another member may be attached to the rear piece portion 906.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43, a lower stopper 912 is provided to abut and support the lower surface of the distribution plate 903 in a posture in which there is no inclination in the front-rear direction. In a state where no external force such as contact of a game ball is acting on the distribution plate 903, the distribution plate 903 is maintained in a posture in which there is no inclination in the front-rear direction (hereinafter referred to as "reference posture"). It has become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44, a game in which a ball enters the central winning unit 37 (route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401) from each ball opening opening 403 on the upper right side of the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905). An exit 921 of an introduction passage 718 that guides the ball is formed. In this embodiment, the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b merge to form a common outlet 921.

Further, at a position directly below the outlet 921 of the introduction passage 718, the game ball discharged from the introduction passage 718 is received and guided to the upper right end portion (uppermost stream portion) of the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905). A receiving plate 922 is provided.

Further, a normal guide portion 704 for guiding the game ball to the normal passage 701 is provided on the left side of the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905), and a game is provided below the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905). A special guide section 705 that guides the ball to the special passage 702 is provided. Normally, the distribution plate 903 is in the reference posture, and the special guide portion 705 is in a state of being blocked by the distribution plate 903.

Then, when the game ball enters the central winning unit 37 (route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401), the game ball passes through the introduction passage 718, via the receiving plate 922, and in front of the distribution plate 903. It is guided to the upper right part of the upper surface of the piece 905. In this embodiment, the weight of the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 plus the weight of one game ball is the weight of the rear piece 906 of the distribution plate 903 and the weight of the weight portion 911. It is configured to be lighter than the weight of the sum of the swords.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44A, even if one game ball is placed on the upper surface of the front piece portion 905, the distribution plate 903 is maintained in the reference posture, and the game ball is held in the front piece portion 905. Will guide you to the normal guide unit 704.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when two or more game balls are placed on the upper surface of the front piece portion 905, the distribution plate 903 is moved from the reference posture with the front piece portion 905 facing forward. It is configured to rotate and displace in a downwardly inclined rotating posture. That is, in this embodiment, the weight obtained by adding the weight of the front piece portion 905 of the distribution plate 903 and the weight of two game balls is the weight of the rear piece portion 906 of the distribution plate 903 and the weight portion 911. It is configured to be heavier than the weight of the sum of the weight of the.

Further, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 43, the special guide portion 705 is opened when the distribution plate 903 is displaced to the rotating posture. Therefore, when two or more game balls are placed on the upper surface of the front piece 905, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the front piece 905 are guided to the special guide 705. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 43, the route distribution device 901 has an upper stopper 913 that abuts and supports the upper surface of the rear piece 906 of the distribution plate 903 displaced to the rotating posture on the rear surface side of the base plate 902. I have. The distribution plate 903 in contact with the upper stopper 913 is maintained in a posture in which the upper surface of the distribution plate 903 is inclined downward toward the front. As a result, after the game ball mounted on the upper surface of the front piece portion 905 moves to the special guide portion 705, the distribution plate 903 is configured to be rotationally displaced to the reference position by the balance of its own weight. ..

As described above, also in this embodiment, when the game balls enter the central winning unit 37 (route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401) almost simultaneously or in quick succession, these plurality of game balls are used. In each case, the route distribution device 703 that guides the ball to the special guide section 705 is provided so that a plurality of game balls can be collectively entered into the specific area 401 and the expectation of entering the special pocket section 416a is increased. It can be matched with that. Therefore, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the player's expectation that the jackpot expectation is improved by collectively entering a plurality of game balls into the specific area 401.

(A-2) In the above-described example of the embodiment (a-1), when the number of game balls mounted on the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 is reduced from a plurality of balls to one, the distribution plate 903 is referred to from the rotating posture. There is a concern that the game ball may be caught between the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 and the glass unit 137 in an attempt to return to the posture, but a configuration for preventing this may be added. For example, in front of the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 in the reference posture, it extends from a position below the front piece 905 to a position above the front piece 905 and has almost the same width as the front piece 905. A relatively lightweight and transparent front cover whose upper side is rotatably supported may be provided. In this case, even when the game ball is sandwiched between the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 that returns from the rotating posture to the reference posture and the front cover, the front cover is rotationally displaced in a follow-up manner. Therefore, the displacement of the distribution plate 903 is allowed.

It should be noted that the angle of the distribution plate 903, which is in a rotating posture by simply shortening the front-rear width of the front piece 905 or placing a plurality of game balls on the front piece 905, is (the momentum of rotation). By configuring the game ball placed on the front piece 905 to be larger than the angle at which it falls on the special guide 705, the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 and the glass unit 137 can be combined. You may prevent the game ball from being caught between the two. Further, in the above embodiment or the like, when the blade member 404 is opened, only one game ball enters the specific area 401 (ball entry opening 403), and only one game ball enters the route distribution device 703. Even if it is guided, the game ball may be configured so that there is a possibility (although it is very low) that the game ball is guided to the special guide unit 705.

(B) Further, the distribution means for distributing the game ball to either the safe passage 427 provided with the special entry detection switch 461 or the out passage 428 provided with the non-special entry detection switch 462 (in the above embodiment). , Rotating body unit 410) and guides the game ball after being detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 to either the 15R entry port 731, the 7R entry port 732, or the 3R entry port 733. The configuration of the type sorting device 741 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed.

For example, the rotating body unit 410 of the above embodiment has a game ball that reaches the front (gate portion 435) of the rotating body 414 via the safe passage 427 on the left side and the rotating body 414 via the safe passage 427 on the right side. The structure is such that it collides with the game ball that has reached the front of the body of revolution, but for example, a configuration is provided in which the ball is guided to the rotating body 414 in order (for example, the route on the left side is directly directed to the rotating body 414). The game ball that is guided in front of the right route, which is guided in front of the rotating body 414 after finally passing through the left route, enters the left route. It is also possible to provide a device to weaken the momentum at the entrance to the left route so that the route on the left side does not flow back significantly (for example, a valve that opens and closes freely is provided so that it can be opened by the weight of the game ball). Good.

Further, for example, with respect to the type sorting device 741, an inclined plate (the front side portion is inclined to the right front) extending slightly downward to the right adjacent to the right side of the start table 742, and a direct inclined plate. It is equipped with an extrusion shutter that can appear and disappear in the upper position, and the entrance to the 3R guide passage 743 is arranged in front of the upstream side of the inclined plate, and the entrance to the 7R guide passage 745 is arranged in front of the downstream side of the inclined plate. The entrance to the 15R guide passage 746 may be arranged on the right side of the.

The probability and ratio of the game ball that has entered the winning / failing lottery area 407 entering the safe passage 427 (detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461) is appropriately set for each pachinko machine model. .. For example, the number of the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 of the rotating body unit 410 may be increased to eight in total, or the number of the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b. By changing the ratio of, for example, 2: 6, 3: 5, etc., the probability that the game ball that has reached the rotating body unit 410 enters the special pocket portion 416a may be changed.

Further, the sorting means may not be rotating, may be reciprocating, and the direction and pattern of movement are not particularly limited. Further, the sorting means does not have to operate, and for example, the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b may be fixedly provided, and further, the game may be provided on the upstream side thereof. A configuration may be provided in which the behavior of a game ball such as a nail is randomized.

(C) In the above embodiment, among the 3R guide passages 743, 7R guide passages 745, and 15R guide passages 746 of the type lottery area 408, the entrances of the passages that can be expected to generate a jackpot state that is more advantageous for the player. It is configured to be arranged on the downstream side of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408, but from the time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736. However, the time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735 is shorter, and the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735. It suffices that the time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is shorter than the time until the game ball is detected. For example, the entrance of the passage that can be expected to generate a jackpot state that is more advantageous for the player may be arranged on the upstream side in the type lottery area 408. However, it is possible to improve the playability by taking the opportunity to give the player a more advantageous jackpot state as much as possible. In particular, when a configuration in which the movement path of the game ball is distributed in a plurality of stages in the type lottery area 408 as in the above embodiment is adopted, such an action effect is more remarkable.

(D) Further, the 7R guide passage 745 is configured so that the moving distance of the game ball is longer than that of the 15R guide passage 746, and the 3R guide passage 743 is configured so that the moving distance of the game ball is longer than that of the 7R guide passage 745. Although it is configured, basically, the 7R guide passage 745 is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the 15R guide passage 746, and the 3R guide passage 743 is configured so that the game ball passes through the 7R guide passage 745. It suffices if it is configured so that the time required for For example, a delay means such as changing the inclination of the 3R guide passages 743, 7R guide passages 745, and 15R guide passages 746, reciprocating or circling the same place several times, and then moving forward, or a game. It is also possible to install a delay means for temporarily stopping the momentum of the ball and guiding it to the next place over a relatively long time in the 3R guidance passage 743 or the like. Incidentally, such delay means may be installed in both the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745, but in that case, the time required for the game ball to pass through the 7R guide passage 745 is the time required for the game ball to pass through the 3R guide passage 743. Install something that does not take longer than the time required for passage.

Of the game balls that have entered the two special pockets 416a of the rotating body 414, the game balls that have entered the type lottery area 408 in advance are detected earlier by the 3R entry detection switch 736, and subsequently. The game ball is configured to be detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735, and the preceding game ball is detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735 earlier than the preceding game ball is detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735, and the subsequent game ball is detected by the 15R entry detection switch. It is configured to be detected by 734. It is also possible to omit the 15R guide passage 746 (so that the game ball jumps directly from the second transfer plate 747 into the 15R entry port 731).

(E) In the above embodiment, the number and contents of the jackpot types are not particularly limited, and are appropriately set for each pachinko machine model. Further, the number and contents of the game modes such as the normal mode and the time reduction mode are not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is shortened, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol display device 41 that teaches the result of the ball entry assist lottery is shortened. , The opening time of the second variable winning device 33b is configured to be long, but instead of or in addition to this, the winning probability of a small hit in the winning / losing lottery is increased, or the winning of the winning assist lottery is made. It may be configured to increase the probability. Further, for example, as a game mode, not only the opening / closing member 33c of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, but also the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device are entered. You may set a probability variation mode that increases the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit in the winning or losing lottery based on entering 33b, or you may win a big hit or a small hit in the winning or losing lottery even though you are not in a high-entry state. You may set a latent mode that increases the probability of doing so. In the winning / failing lottery, the jackpot may not be won.

(F) In the above embodiment, both the route distribution device 703 and the type distribution device 741 are provided in the specific area 401, but it is possible to omit either one. Further, in the above embodiment, the central winning unit 37 determines whether or not to give a jackpot state depending on the behavior (ball entry destination) of the game ball that has entered, and also determines the type of the jackpot state. However, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration.

(F-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the game ball detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 enters any of the 15R entry port 731, the 7R entry port 732, and the 3R entry port 733. The jackpot type is determined in an analog manner depending on whether or not it is performed, but when the type sorting device 741 is omitted and the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, the value of the corresponding random number counter is acquired and acquired. The jackpot type may be determined by a lottery such as which jackpot type the value of the random number counter corresponds to. Further, for example, when a small hit is won in a winning / losing lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the central winning unit 37 is opened in response to the small hit. The jackpot type given when the game ball enters the special pocket portion 416a and the safe passage 427 (detected by the special entry detection switch 461) is also determined. It may be configured as follows. Even in the case of adopting these configurations, when a plurality of game balls entering the specific area 401 are simultaneously distributed, a route distribution device 703 is provided so that all of the plurality of game balls can be guided to the special passage 702. As a result, it is relatively rare that a game ball enters the specific area 401 almost at the same time, and when a phenomenon occurs in which a jackpot state is likely to occur sensuously, it is practically possible. The jackpot expectation can be increased.

Further, in the above embodiment, the route distribution device 703 is given a jackpot state when the game ball enters, and the safe passage 427 where a predetermined number of prize balls are given and the game ball enter. As a result, although the specified number of prize balls are given, the jackpot state is not given (it is out of the way). It is configured to guide the game ball to either the out passage 428, but it is limited to such a configuration. It's not something. For example, in a configuration in which the type sorting device 741 is omitted, a winning / failing lottery for whether or not a jackpot state is generated when a game ball enters (detection of the game ball is performed) and a type lottery for determining the type of the jackpot state Is the jackpot state generated by the first start ball entry means (first start ball entry detection means) as the first ball entry means and the game ball entering (the game ball is detected)? The first start ball entry means is provided with a second start ball entry means (second start ball entry detection means) as a second ball entry means in which a lottery for winning or failing and a type lottery for determining the type of the jackpot state are performed. Rather than the distribution of the types of jackpot states that can be given when a jackpot state is won in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means, the game ball enters the second starting ball entry means. In a configuration in which the distribution of the type of jackpot state that can be given when the jackpot state is won in the winning / failing lottery conducted based on the above is more advantageous for the advantageous person, the route distribution device 703 is the first starting ball entry means. Or, in the case of guiding the game ball to either of the second starting ball entering means (in the case of one ball, guiding to the first starting ball entering means, and in the case of two balls (plural balls in the above embodiment (a-1))). May be configured to guide to the second starting ball entry means).

Further, for example, the first ball entry means (first ball entry detection means) in which m game balls are given when the game ball enters (the game ball is detected), and the game ball enters the ball. (Detection of game balls is performed), the route distribution device 703 is provided with a second ball entry means (second ball entry detection means) in which n game balls more than m are assigned. Guide the game ball to either the 1st ball entry means or the 2nd ball entry means (in the case of 1 ball, the game ball is guided to the 1st ball entry means, and 2 balls (plural balls in the above embodiment (a-1)). In that case, it may be configured to guide the ball to the second ball entry means).

(F-2) Further, for example, a route in which the possibility of being guided to the special passage 702 is (quite) low unless a plurality of game balls enter the specific area 401 at almost the same time as in the above embodiment. The distribution device 703 is omitted, and instead, even if the game balls enter the specific area 401 one by one, the route distribution device may guide the game balls to the special passage 702. (Movable or not) may be provided. In addition, for example, the special passage 702 may be omitted (the movement path of the game ball may be configured so that there is no advantage or disadvantage in entering the safe passage 427), or the game ball entering the specific area 401 rotates. The movement route to the body 414 may be configured to be one straight road, and the route distribution device 703 may be omitted.

(F-3) Further, for example, when the central winning unit 37 is configured as the second variable winning device and the jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery based on the winning balls to the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the jackpot state is reached. The blade member 404 may be configured to be open in a predetermined number of rounds. In this case, the central winning unit 37 has a role of determining the game mode to be given after the end of the jackpot state, specifically, for example, a role of giving either a time reduction mode or a probability variation mode after the end of the jackpot state. (1: The type lottery area 408 in the above embodiment is omitted, and it is determined whether or not the probability variation mode is given by the rotating body unit 410 (the special pocket portion 416 is entered and the special entry detection switch 461 is used. It may be configured so that the probability change mode is given by the detection, and the non-special entry detection switch 462 may be detected before that (2: the winning / failing lottery area 407 in the above embodiment, and the winning / failing lottery area 407 in the above embodiment). The route distribution area 406 is omitted, and it is determined whether or not to give the probability variation mode by the type distribution device 741 (in the above embodiment, the probability variation mode is detected by the switch configured as the 15R ball entry detection switch 734). It may be configured to be invalid if the other switches 745 and 746, which are set so that the time saving mode is given by the detection, are detected before the grant.

Further, the first start winning device 33a without the opening / closing member 33c is arranged below the central winning unit 37 or in the game area on the left side, and the second starting winning device 33b having the opening / closing member 33c is placed in the central winning unit 37. It is arranged in the right game area (right game area), the through gate 34 is arranged only in the right game area, and in the normal mode, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery is low, and the opening / closing member 33c is opened. If not, the ball may be configured so as not to be able to enter the second start winning device 33b.

It should be noted that the jackpot state given when the ball is won in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b is the winning state of the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a. It is configured so that there is a higher possibility that a jackpot state that is advantageous to the player or a jackpot state that is advantageous to the player will be selected, rather than the jackpot state that is given when the player wins the winning or losing lottery based on the result. You may. For example, when a jackpot is won in a winning or losing lottery based on a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, the end condition of a predetermined jackpot round in the jackpot state is that the central winning unit 37 opens for 1 second x 2 times. Or, if a jackpot is won in a winning or losing lottery based on winning a ball in the second starting winning device 33b, which is set up to 8 balls, the end condition of the predetermined jackpot round in the jackpot state is set. The central winning unit 37 may be configured to be opened once for 30 seconds or set up to eight balls as the upper limit. In this case, in a predetermined jackpot round in the jackpot state based on the entry into the second starting winning device 33b, the number of game balls entering the central winning unit 37 increases, so that the second starting winning device 33b is entered. The jackpot state based on the ball is more advantageous.

(G) In the above embodiment, when the pair of left and right blade members 404 operate in synchronization with each other, that is, when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and when one is in the closed position. The other is also configured to be in the closed position, but may be configured such that only one of them may operate independently. That is, when a small hit is won in the winning / failing lottery, of the pair of left and right blade members 404, only the left side is the open position and only the right side is the open position, and both are the open positions. The pattern may be configured to exist. Further, as a pattern in which both are in the open position, a pattern in which both are opened and closed at the same timing, a pattern in which the left side is early, and a pattern in which the right side is early may be set. In addition, which of the blade members 404 to be opened may be configured to be able to be taught by a liquid crystal display, voice, lighting of a light emitting means, or the like (there may be a state of teaching and a state of not teaching). ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the specific region 401 is changed into a state in which the ball can enter the specific region 401 and a state in which the specific region 401 cannot enter the specific region 401 by the blade member 404. In addition to the ball entry opening 403 that is opened and closed by the blade member 404, there is a possibility that the ball may always enter the specific area 401 by providing an opening that allows the ball to enter the specific area 401. It may be configured as follows.

(H) Further, in the above embodiment, the first ball that has entered the first entry opening 403a on the left side of the pair of left and right entry openings 403 in the central winning unit 37 is guided to the route distribution device 703. The lengths of the introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b that guides the game ball that has entered the second entry opening 403b on the right side to the route distribution device 703 are the same, but different. It may be configured as follows. In addition, a movable passage for lengthening (or changing the moving speed of the game ball) the introduction passages 718a and 718b may be provided in one or both of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b. .. When these configurations are adopted, even if the game ball does not enter the first ball opening 403a and the second ball opening 403b at the same time, the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 714 and the second of the route distribution device 703 are adopted. Two game balls may fall on the wing portion 715 at the same time.

In the above embodiment, the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b are folded back and forth, making it difficult to see the game ball moving in the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b. At least the portion near the exit may be configured to extend in the left-right direction and be visible from the front (partitioned by a transparent front panel or opened forward).

Further, the route distribution device 703 of the above embodiment may be adopted, and the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b may be configured to merge as in the above embodiment (a-1). Further, when such a configuration is adopted, the game balls are configured to be able to fall on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution device 703 at the same time (the width of the exit of the introduction passage after merging is increased). Wide, etc.) In addition, near the exit of the introduction passage after merging, the game ball may be configured to move slowly, roll left and right, and then fall, etc., so that the player can easily recognize the game ball. .. When such a configuration is adopted, when a plurality of game balls enter the one of the first ball opening 403a or the second ball opening 403b in succession, the plurality of game balls. The game ball may fall on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution device 703 at the same time. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the specific area 401 from both the first entry ball opening 403a and the second entry ball opening 403b and does not aim at the launch position of the game ball, it enters either one. Since it is only necessary to aim at the launch position of the game ball so that it is easy to hit the ball, the operability and game playability are simplified (for example, a game that does not know the game property such that both must be entered at the same time). Even a person does not lose). The ball entry opening 403 may be set to one place.

Further, a stopping means is provided in the introduction passage 718, and for example, a game ball that has entered the specific area 404 (ball entry opening 403) while the left and right blade members 404 are opened once is temporarily stopped in the stopping means. After being made to do so, it may be configured to be guided to the route distribution device 703 at once. In this case, even if the timing of entering the specific area 404 (ball entry opening 403) is slightly different, if the game ball can be entered into the specific area 404 between the opening and closing of the blade member 404. , The timing of dropping to the route distribution device 703 can be adjusted.

The stopping means may be configured to switch between an open state in which movement to the route distribution device 703 is permitted and a closed state in which movement to the route distribution device 703 is permitted for a certain period of time. It is displaced between the open position where movement to the device 703 is allowed and the closed position where it is regulated, and the operation of the stopping means is relatively slow, before the stopping means is switched from the closed position to the open position. , The game ball that has entered the specific area 404 (ball entry opening 403) while the blade member 404 is open may be configured to be stopped by the stopping means.

(I) In the above embodiment, in the preceding effect processing, only when the value of the ball entry counter is 0 and the value of the ball jam counter is 1, the setting processing of the 3R preceding opening command or the 7R preceding is performed. Although it is configured to perform the setting process of the opening command, if the value of the ball entry counter is 0, the setting process of the opening command may be performed regardless of the value of the ball jam counter. However, if the value of the ball jam counter is other than 0, the setting process of the opening command may be performed (if it is 0, for example, error processing may be performed).

That is, when the value of the ball clogging counter is 2 or more, another game ball precedes the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754, and another game ball is in the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage. It is in a situation where it already exists in 745. In the above embodiment, if the preceding game ball exists, the jackpot state will start without waiting so much, so a configuration is adopted in which the derivation of the preceding opening effect is refrained. Further, by adopting such a configuration, for example, the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754 was confirmed, but at that time, there is a game ball already moving in the 3R guidance passage 743 (near the exit). Therefore, even if the advance opening effect for the 7-round jackpot is performed based on the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754, the situation that the 3-round jackpot is actually given instead of the 7-round jackpot is avoided. can do.

However, if the passage time of the game ball in the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745 is longer, the reaction regarding the occurrence of the jackpot is derived after the value of the ball entry counter becomes 0. The time lag may be too long. In such a case, as described above, such a concern can be suppressed by deriving the preceding opening effect even if the value of the ball clogging counter is not 1.

Further, even in the case of adopting such a configuration, since the value of the ball entry counter is 0, there is no possibility that the subsequent game ball will generate a more advantageous jackpot state. Although the effect was derived, another game ball was detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 before the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 was detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and 15 It is possible to avoid a situation such as a big hit state of a round big hit.

After step S7705 in FIG. 32, a process of turning on the 3R passing flag indicating that the game ball is passing through the 3R guide passage 743 is added, and after step S7711, the game ball passes through the 7R guide passage 745. A process of turning on the 7R passing flag indicating that the passage is in progress is added. Further, in step S7703, instead of the process of determining the value of the ball jam counter, it is determined whether or not the 7R passing flag is turned on, and if affirmative determination is made, the game passing through the 7R guidance passage 745. Since the ball will be detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 first, the advance opening command for the 7-round jackpot is set (if a negative judgment is made, the advance opening command for the 3-round jackpot is set. Set). Further, in step S7709, instead of the process of determining the value of the ball jam counter, it is determined whether or not the 3R passing flag is turned on, and if affirmative determination is made, a 7-round jackpot and a 3-round jackpot are determined. It may be configured so that the shared preceding opening command is set, or the preceding opening command is not set (if a negative judgment is made, the preceding opening command for the 7-round jackpot is set). Further, for example, the preceding opening effect may be shared between the 7-round jackpot and the 3-round jackpot (same mode). When these configurations are adopted, it is possible to avoid a contradiction between the mode of the preceding opening effect and the actual jackpot type. The 3R passing flag and the 7R passing flag are turned off at the start or end of the jackpot state.

(J) In the remaining ball monitoring process of the above embodiment, an error notification process performed when the value of the monitoring timer becomes 0 in a state where the value of the ball entry counter is determined to be other than 0, and a ball jam counter. The mode (content) of error notification may be different from the error notification processing performed when the value of the monitoring timer becomes 0 in a state where it is determined that the value of is other than 0. That is, depending on the ball entry counter, the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 of the route distribution area 406, the winning / failing lottery area 407, and the type lottery area 408 are on the upstream side. It is possible to grasp that the game ball is jammed in the area. Further, by the ball clogging counter, the area of the type lottery area 408 on the downstream side of the 3R early detection switch 753 and on the upstream side of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, or on the downstream side of the 7R early detection switch 754. In addition, it can be grasped that the game ball is jammed in the region upstream of the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, that is, in the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745. Therefore, by making the error notification different, it is possible to more specifically indicate where the ball clogging occurs in the specific area 401.

(K) In the above embodiment, when the preceding opening effect is performed, the jackpot state in which the opening effect is shortened is performed, but the jackpot state in which the opening effect is omitted is performed. You may.

(L) In the above embodiment, when a detection switch is installed in the special guide unit 705 or the special passage 702 and the game ball is detected, a sound effect for teaching that the game ball is passing through the special route or It may be configured to generate a lighting effect of the lamp.

(M) In the above embodiment, the semitransparent covering cover 756 that covers the front of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 is provided, but the design of the covering cover 756 can be changed as appropriate. It is also possible to omit the covering cover 756. Further, for example, an LED that irradiates light toward the back surface of the 3R seal 757a, 7R seal 757b, or 15R seal 757c is provided, and the 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, or 15R ball entry detection switch is provided. When the detection by 734 is performed, the corresponding LED may be turned on. Further, it may be configured to blink when promotion is being accepted.

(N) In the above embodiment, the winning probability and the variable display time of the winning / failing lottery are the same regardless of which of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is filled with the game ball. When a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a and when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, the big hit and the small hit at the time of winning / failing lottery are distributed, and when the ball is won in each lottery. The contents of the benefits may be different. For example, based on the first special display device in which the variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery performed based on the entry into the first start winning device 33a and the entry into the second start winning device 33b are performed. If a small hit is won in the winning / losing lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, a second special display device is provided in which a variable display is performed to teach the result of the winning / failing lottery. , The blade member 404 is opened only once for 1 second at a rate of 9/10, and the blade member 404 is opened twice for 1 second at a rate of 1/10 to enter the second start winning device 33b. If a small hit is won in the winning / failing lottery based on, the blade member 404 is opened only once for 1 second at a rate of 1/10, and the blade member 404 is opened for 1 second at a rate of 9/10. It may be configured to be opened once.

(O) Further, in the above embodiment, up to a total of four variable displays of the special display device 43 that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning or failing of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b can be reserved. However, the number of pending reservations is not particularly limited. For example, a configuration may be configured in which up to four (a total of eight) variable displays can be reserved corresponding to each of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. When this configuration is adopted, the number of hold of the variation display based on the ball entering each of the starting winning devices 33a and 33b may be separately grasped. Further, when the configuration is adopted, for example, the variation display based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b is preferentially digested over the variation display based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. The first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b may be configured to execute the corresponding variable display in the order in which the balls were entered.

It should be noted that the variable display of the winning / failing lottery may not be suspended. Further, the number of holdings of the variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry assist lottery is not particularly limited, and a configuration capable of holding less than 4 or 5 or more may be used, or the ball entry assist lottery may be held. The variable display may not be held.

(P) Further, in the above embodiment, two starting ball entering means (first starting winning device 33a and second starting winning device 33b) are provided, but one or three or more may be provided. .. Further, the arrangement of the starting and entering means is not particularly limited. In the above embodiment, a "big hit" (direct hit jackpot) may be won in a lottery based on the entry into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, but the entry into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. In the lottery based on, the grant of "big hit" may not be decided (so that it is distributed to "small hit" or "missing"). Further, when a ball enters the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the blade member 404 may be configured to be always opened (always "small hit" and not disengaged). Further, in the above embodiment, the blade member 404 may be opened a plurality of times (for example, twice) for each "small hit".

(Q) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is omitted, and based on the entry into the special winning opening 442 and the non-special winning opening 443 (detection of the special entry detection switch 461 and the non-special entry detection switch 462). Assuming that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, a predetermined number (for example, 8) of the blade members 404 of the central winning unit 37 is released until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, or in a specific area 401. It may be applied to a gaming machine in which the game state is set as one round until the game ball enters, and the gaming state during which the predetermined round (for example, 3, 8, or 16 rounds) is repeated is set as the jackpot state. In this case, the central winning unit 37 also functions as the variable winning device 32. In addition to the pachinko machine, it may be used as an arrange ball machine or various game machines such as a sparrow ball similar to the pachinko machine.

(R) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a vibration detecting means for detecting the vibration of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 is shaken (struck) in a state where the power is turned on. Vibration is detected by the vibration detecting means, and when the detection is performed, error processing (error notification in the pachinko machine 10, temporary suspension of the game (normal processing, etc.), external such as a hall computer, etc.) Error information output to) is configured to be performed.

In addition, when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408, such as when the special ball entry detection switch 461 (type entry detection means) is detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 (display means) , "Don't shake the table. If vibration is detected, the jackpot may be invalidated", etc., a caution display (basic voice announcement, etc.) that calls attention not to vibrate the pachinko machine 10. The guidance may be configured to derive (preferably completed between the time when the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 and the time when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408). In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being too absorbed in the game (involuntarily or intentionally) shaking the pachinko machine 10, and the shaking of the pachinko machine 10 causes the behavior of the game ball. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a change occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfavorable situation for both the player such as the pachinko machine 10 vibrating and the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

Further, when the vibration detection level by the vibration detecting means is set in a plurality of stages and the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 such as when the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, the vibration is vibrated. It may be configured so that the detection level is raised (even smaller vibrations can be detected). In addition, instead of performing error processing with one vibration detection, an error occurs when a warning is displayed once and then vibration is detected (for example, with the warning displayed). It may be configured so that the processing is performed.

(S) In the above embodiment, instead of determining the occurrence of the jackpot state based on the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 461 (for example, the special ball entry detection switch 46 may be omitted, or the special ball entry detection switch 46 may be used. (Used only for directing), 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is configured to determine the occurrence of each type of jackpot state. You may.

Further, the central winning unit 37 is provided separately from the special ball entry detection switch 461, and has a type entry detection switch (type entry detection means) that detects a game ball (immediately before) led out to the type lottery area 408. A back passage counter that counts up based on the detection of the special entry detection switch 461 and counts down based on the detection of the type entry detection switch, and a back passage counter that is provided near the entrance to the type lottery area 408 and is used as the value of the back passage counter. It may be provided with a type entry standby lamp (two in this example) whose lighting is controlled correspondingly. In this case, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game balls and the like entering the type lottery area 408.

Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the passage (back passage) from the rotating body 414 (safe passage 427) to the type lottery area 408 (starting platform 742) can be visually recognized by the player in front. It may be configured. Further, in the back passage, the game balls may be configured to flow down one by one so that the order of the game balls is not changed. In addition, in the back passage, etc., the interval adjusting means for adjusting the interval of the game balls that continuously enter the type lottery area 408 (shutter that opens and closes at a predetermined interval, rotates at a fixed interval, and moves the game balls one by one to the downstream side A wind body that can guide the vehicle) may be provided. In this case, it is possible to suppress variations in the behavior of the game balls that continuously enter the type lottery area 408.

(T) In the above embodiment, the special ball entry detection switch 461, the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the ball entry count switch 437, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 7345, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, Equipped with a detection history storage means capable of accumulating and storing the detection information (detection history) of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, the stored contents of the detection history storage means can be derived to the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like. It may be configured. Further, the detection information may be configured to be output to the outside (hall computer or the like) of the pachinko machine 10 each time it is detected or at predetermined intervals. In this case, since the behavior history of the game ball in the specific area 401 is clearly left, it is necessary to avoid the trouble of where the game ball enters between the player and the game hole, which is complicated. Can be done.

In particular, when the time of the real-time clock for grasping the current time provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the detection history are stored in association with each other, such an action effect is more remarkably exhibited. The detection history of the detection history storage means may be configured to be erased within a predetermined period (1 day, 1 week, etc.), or may be configured to be erased by a RAM clear operation. Good (power on or off is not desirable). Further, the values of the ball entry counter and the ball clogging counter may be configured so that they can be derived to the outside of the decorative symbol display device 42 or the pachinko machine 10.

(U) The central winning unit 37 may be provided with a stopping means capable of stopping the game ball moving in the specific area 401. Here, an example of an embodiment in which the stopping means is embodied in the type sorting device 741 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. In the above embodiment, the upper limit of the game balls that continuously enter the type lottery area 408 is substantially two balls, but in this embodiment, three or more game balls are continuously entered by type lottery. It is assumed that the ball can enter the region 408 (for example, the rotating body 414 has four or more pocket portions 416 and three or more special pocket portions 416a).

As shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the type sorting device 741 is provided adjacent to the downstream (right side) edge of the start table 742, and is slightly inclined downward toward the right side like the start table 742. The distribution plate 931 is provided. By forming three planar view circular holes into which the game balls can be inserted in the distribution plate 931 in the longitudinal direction of the distribution plate 931, one game ball can be inserted into the distribution plate 931. The 3R stop section 933, the 7R stop section 934, and the 15R stop section 935 are provided.

Below the distribution plate 931, the game ball that has entered the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, and 15R stop 935 is supported, and the game ball is placed on the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, and 15R stop. A stop rotating body 937 is provided as a stop means that can be stopped at 935. The stationary rotating body 937 has a substantially cylindrical shape, and is provided so that the center line of the cylindrical body serves as a rotation center axis and the rotation center axis extends in the left-right direction along the longitudinal direction of the distribution plate 931.

Further, on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body 937, a discharge recess 938 is formed at a position corresponding to the 3R stationary portion 933, the 7R stationary portion 934, and the 15R stationary portion 935, respectively, and can accommodate the game ball. .. Further, below the stationary rotating body 937, each entrance of the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 is provided.

Then, as the stop rotating body 937 rotates, the period in which each discharge recess 938 matches the 3R stop portion 933, the 7R stop portion 934, and the 15R stop portion 935 and the period in which they do not match are repeated. There is. That is, when the discharge recess 938 does not match the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, and 15R stop 935, respectively (the discharge recess 938 faces downward), the 3R stop 933, 7R stop The game ball that has entered the 934, 15R stop 935 will be stopped at the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, and 15R stop 935. After that, when the stop rotating body 937 rotates until the discharge recess 938 coincides with the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, and 15R stop 935, the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, and 15R stop 935 are formed. The parked game ball will be housed in the corresponding discharge recess 938. Further, as the stationary rotating body 937 rotates, the game ball housed in each discharge recess 938 enters the corresponding 3R guide passages 743, 7R guide passages 745, and 15R guide passages 746. That is, the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 enters the 3R guidance passage 743, and the game ball stopped at the 7R stop 934 enters the 7R guidance passage 745 and is stopped at the 15R guidance passage 935. The game ball enters the 15R guide passage 746.

Further, the stationary rotating body 937 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) and rotates so that the surface facing upward moves forward. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the type lottery area 408, the stationary rotating body 937 is stopped in the reference posture (reference position) in which the discharge recess 938 faces downward. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, when the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 as the arrival detection means, the stepping motor is driven and the stationary rotating body 937 is configured to start rotating. In this embodiment, the stationary rotating body 937 is displaced to the receiving posture in which the discharge recess 938 faces upward in 6.5 seconds from the reference posture, and is displaced to the reference posture in 3 seconds from the receiving posture. It is configured to do. Further, the game balls stopped in the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935 are simultaneously housed in the discharge recesses 938 of the stop rotating body 937, and the 3R guide passages from the discharge recesses 938 at the same time. The 743 and 7R guide passages 745 and 15R guide passages 746 are entered.

The stationary rotating body 937 that has made one rotation and returned to the reference posture is stopped in that posture. Further, the stationary rotating body 937 is configured to constantly rotate (until the end of the ending) during the jackpot state. Further, at the end of the jackpot state, the remaining spheres in the specific area 401 are confirmed, and if there are no remaining spheres, the jackpot state ends, and if there are remaining spheres, the ending is extended for a predetermined time and the predetermined time. When the above is reached, an error is displayed. In addition, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and 15R ball entry detection switch 734 have a valid state in which detection is valid and an invalid state in which detection is invalid. When the detection switches 735 and 15R ball entry detection switch 734 are detected, the state is switched to the invalid state, and when the remaining balls in the specific area 401 are exhausted at the end of the jackpot state, the state is switched to the valid state.

Incidentally, the time from when the game ball housed in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 enters the safe passage 427 to when it reaches the type lottery area 408 is about 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the state in which the game ball is housed in the discharge recess 938 of the stationary rotating body 937 and the stationary rotating body 937 is moving corresponds to the guidance state, and the other states correspond to the stationary state.

Further, the 7R entry detection after the game ball enters the 7R guidance passage 745 is longer than the 15R arrival time from the entry of the game ball into the 15R guidance passage 746 to the detection by the 15R entry detection switch 734. It is configured so that the 7R arrival time until it is detected by the switch 735 is longer (the movement distance is longer), and the 3R after the game ball enters the 3R guidance passage 743 than the 7R arrival time. It is configured so that the 3R arrival time until it is detected by the ball entry detection switch 736 is longer (the moving distance is longer). Therefore, when the game ball is parked at the 15R stop 935, the jackpot state of "15R jackpot" is displayed regardless of whether the game ball is parked at the 3R stop 933 or the 7R stop 934. It will occur. Further, when the game ball is stopped at the 7R stop 934 and the game ball is not stopped at the 15R stop 935, the "7R jackpot" regardless of whether or not the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933. The jackpot state of "" is coming to occur. Further, when the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933 and the game ball is not stopped at the 7R stop 934 and the 15R stop 935, the big hit state of "3R big hit" is generated. .. As in the above embodiment, in the big hit state or the state in which the occurrence of the big hit state is determined, the game ball is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and the 15R ball entry detection switch 734. Even if it is done, the detection of the jackpot state corresponding to the detection is not given.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the position between the distribution plate 931 and the stop rotating body 937, the game ball that has entered the 3R stop portion 933, the 7R stop portion 934, and the 15R stop portion 935 and is stopped is detected. The 3R standby detection switch 941, the 7R standby detection switch 942, and the 15R standby detection switch 943 are provided. Further, on the vertical wall surface behind the distribution plate 931, the 3R standby lamp 944 and the 7R standby lamp 945 as the entrance display unit correspond to the rear positions of the 3R stop portion 933, the 7R stop portion 934, and the 15R stop portion 935, respectively. , 15R standby lamp 946 is provided.

In this embodiment, the 3R standby lamp 944 lights up when the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected, and the 7R standby lamp 945 lights up when the 7R standby detection switch 942 is detected. When the 15R standby detection switch 943 is detected, the 15R standby lamp 946 is turned on, and when a predetermined jackpot state occurs, various standby lamps 944, 945, 946 are turned off. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the display of "big hit type lottery in progress" is derived based on the detection information of the special ball entry detection switch 461, and when the 15R standby detection switch 943 is detected, "15 rounds". "Congratulations on the jackpot" is derived, and when the 7R standby detection switch 942 is detected and the 15R standby detection switch 943 is not detected, the indication "7 round jackpot or more confirmed" is derived. When the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected and the 7R standby detection switch 942 and the 15R standby detection switch 943 are not detected, the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected. Even so, the indication "Lottery by jackpot type" is only being derived as it is. The standby teaching means (early teaching means) has a function of turning on the standby lamps 944, 945, 946 and deriving the display of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the detection information of the standby detection switches 941, 942, 943. ) Corresponds to.

Further, in this embodiment, in the distribution plate 931, the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935 are arranged side by side from the upstream side, and basically, the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933. When a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 (start table 742) in a state where the game ball has not been played, the game ball enters the 3R stop 933 and is stopped at the 3R stop 933. There is.

Further, when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933, the game ball gets over the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 (). It reaches the 7R stop 934 (as a stepping stone), enters the 7R stop 934, and is stopped.

In addition, when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934, the game ball enters the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934. It is designed to get over the game ball parked in (as a stepping stone) to reach the 15R stop 935, enter the 15R stop 935, and stop.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 receives a game ball that has not entered any of the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935 adjacent to the downstream edge of the distribution plate 931. A discharge port 948 for discharging to the outside is provided. In addition, in order to grasp the presence / absence (remaining ball) of the game ball in the specific area 401, an discharge detection switch 949 for detecting the game ball discharged from the discharge port 948 is provided, and a ball entry counter is provided when the detection is performed. The value of is subtracted.

In this embodiment, the 3R stop 933 is the first stop for the 7R stop 934 and the 15R stop 935, and the 7R stop 934 is the second stop for the 3R stop 933, which is 15R. It is the first stop for the stop 935, and the 15R stop 935 is the second stop for the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934. Further, the 3R standby detection switch 941 is a first standby detection means for the 7R standby detection switch 942 and the 15R standby detection switch 943, and the 7R standby detection switch 942 is a second standby detection means for the 3R standby detection switch 941. , The first standby detection means for the 15R standby detection switch 943, and the 15R standby detection switch 943 is the second standby detection means for the 3R standby detection switch 941 and the 7R standby detection switch 942. In addition, in this embodiment, the standby detection switches 941, 942, 943 constitute early detection means, the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, the 15R stop 935, and the 3R guide passage 743, 7R guide passage. The 745 and 15R guide passages 746 constitute an entry route (first entry route and second entry route).

As described above, in this embodiment, the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935 for stopping the game ball are provided in the type distribution device 741 of the type lottery area 408, and the game ball is provided. It is possible to grasp which jackpot type is given depending on where it is stopped. That is, it is confirmed that the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 will be detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736, and the game ball stopped at the 7R stop 934 will be detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735. It is confirmed that the game ball is detected, and the game ball stopped at the 15R stop unit 935 is confirmed to be detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734. Further, for example, the game balls stopped at the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935 have entered the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 all at once. In this case, among the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, the one in which the detection that is advantageous to the player is performed is configured so that the game ball is detected first. There is. As a result, for example, when the game ball is stopped at all of the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935, the game ball stopped at the 15R stop 935 is the 15R ball entry detection switch. It is configured to generate a "15R jackpot" based on being detected by 734.

Therefore, for example, the game ball stopped at the 15R stop 935 is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, but the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 or the 7R stop 934 is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R. Since it was also guided to the guidance passage 745, it is possible that the "15R jackpot" will not occur (it will become the "3R jackpot" or "7R jackpot"). Can be done. Therefore, it is necessary to secure an easy-to-understand game property that the game ball may be stopped at the 7R stop 934 rather than the 3R stop 933, and further at the 15R stop 935 rather than the 7R stop 934. It is possible to clarify the points of excitement (highlights, highlights).

Further, it is easier for the player to stop the game ball in the stop portions 934 and 935, which is more advantageous for the player, and the game ball is stopped in the 3R stop portion 933 when a lot of game balls are put into the type lottery area 408. Since it is not necessary to be afraid of this, it is possible to associate a large number of game balls into the type lottery area 408, or more fundamentally, the specific area 401 with an advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the situation of having a negative image about putting the game ball into the specific area 401, and to make the game playability such as putting the game ball into the specific area 401 as much as possible. Can be.

In addition, each of the stopping portions 933, 934, and 935 is formed in a concave shape capable of accommodating one game ball at a time. Therefore, the game ball stopped at the stop portions 933, 934, 935 can be more reliably held (positioned) at the stop portions 933, 934, 935. Therefore, with the game ball parked in the type sorting device 741, it is more accurately determined whether or not the parked game ball is guided to which guidance passages 743, 745, 746. It becomes possible. Further, it is easier to recognize that the game ball is guided to the guidance passages 743, 745, 746 as compared with the configuration in which the game ball enters the guidance passages 743, 745, 746 by the flow without staying. Can be done. Further, the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, and the state in which the occurrence of the "15R jackpot" is confirmed can be enjoyed, and the state in which the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746 can be visually recognized more carefully. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the game playability such that the game ball is stopped at the type sorting device 741 (each stop portion 933, 934, 935).

Further, in this embodiment, standby detection switches 941, 942, 943 capable of detecting a game ball stopped at each stop 933, 934, 935 are provided. Therefore, if the game ball is stopped at the stop portions 933, 934, 935 and the stop state is released, the game ball is guided to, for example, the 15R guide passage 746 (“15R jackpot” is displayed. It is possible to teach that (occurs), or that, at present, the game ball is only guided to the 3R guide passage 743 (“3R jackpot” occurs). Therefore, in the type sorting device 741, it is possible to enhance the effectability in the stopped state in which the game ball is stopped, and to improve the interest.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935 are arranged in this order from the upstream side in the type lottery area 408, and basically, the game ball is stopped in the 3R stop 933. By setting the game ball to the 7R stop 934, the game ball can be reached and stopped at the 7R stop 934, and by setting the game ball to the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934, the game ball can be stopped. Is configured to reach the 15R stop 935 and stop. Therefore, by making the plurality of game balls reach the type lottery area 408, it is possible to enjoy the appearance of stepping in an advantageous manner for the player. In addition, it is possible to take a good impression that the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop portion 933 or the 7R stop portion 934.

Further, the stationary rotating body 937 of this embodiment does not always continue to move, but basically stops in a reference posture in which the discharge recess 938 faces downward, and the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected. Starts operation when done. Then, when it makes one rotation and returns to the reference posture, it stops. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball that has reached the type sorting device 741 passes through the type sorting device 741 with almost no stopping, as in the case where the stationary rotating body 937 continues to operate. it can. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably enjoy the real pleasure of enjoying how the game ball stays in the type sorting device 741.

In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 when the game ball is not stopped at the 3R stop 933, the game ball enters the 3R stop 933 and is 3R. If the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is stopped at the stop section 933 and the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop section 933, the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop section 933. Overcoming the ball (as a stepping stone) to reach the 7R stop 934, entering the 7R stop 934 and stopping, and the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933 and 7R stop 934. When the game ball enters the lottery area 408, the game ball gets over the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934 and reaches the 15R stop 935 (as a stepping stone). , The ball enters the 15R stop 935 and is stopped, but the game ball reaches the 7R stop 934 and the 15R stop 935 even when the game ball is not stopped at the 3R stop 933. It may be configured so that the ball may be entered and stopped. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the game ball reaches the 7R stop portion 934 or the 15R stop portion 935 when the game ball is stopped than when the game ball is not stopped at the 3R stop portion 933. Because it is easy to play, it is possible to secure game playability such as aiming to allow a large number of game balls to enter the specific area 401.

(V) Next, a modified example of the type sorting device 741 shown in FIG. 46 will be described. Similar to the type sorting device 741 of FIG. 45, the type sorting device 741 of this embodiment is provided with a sorting plate 951 adjacent to the start table 742. However, the jackpot types given based on the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 461 of this embodiment are only "15 round jackpot" and "8 round jackpot", and correspondingly, the distribution plate 951 has a jackpot type. , The upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953 are provided. In this example as well, the upper stop portion 952 is on the upstream side, and the game ball is basically stopped at the upper stop portion 952 so that the game ball can reach the lower stop portion 953. However, even if the game ball is not stopped at the upper stop portion 952, the game ball may be configured to reach the lower stop portion 953. However, even if only one game ball enters the type lottery area 408, some jackpot type is always determined.

Below the distribution plate 951, a stop shutter 954 is provided as a stop means for stopping the game ball that has entered the upper stop 952 and the lower stop 953 at the upper stop 952 and the lower stop 953. There is. The retaining shutter 954 extends in the horizontal direction and is configured to be displaceable back and forth and horizontally between the protruding position protruding downward from the distribution plate 951 and the open position immersed in the front surface of the game board 30. There is. When the stop shutter 954 is set to the protruding position, the type sorting device 741 capable of stopping the game ball at the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953 is set to the stop state, and the stop shutter 954 is set to the open position. In this case, the game ball stopped at the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953 is brought into the guidance state of the type sorting device 741 which is guided to the downstream side (the sorter 954 described later). The stop shutter 954 is set to the open position, for example, 5.5 seconds after the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, and is set to the protruding position, for example, 0.4 seconds after the open position (big hit). Always open position during the state).

A sorter 954 (sorting portion) is provided below the retention shutter 954. The sorter 954 has the same configuration as the route sorter 703 of the above embodiment, and has a shaft portion 957 pivotally supported by the shaft pin 956 and a first wing portion 958 protruding to the left from the shaft portion 957. And a second wing portion 959 that protrudes to the right from the shaft portion 957, and has a symmetrical shape. The first guide surface 958a, which is the upper surface of the first wing portion 958, is inclined downward toward the left side, and the second guide surface 959a, which is the upper surface of the second wing portion 959, is inclined downward toward the right side. Although the distributor 954 is rotatably supported, when no external force is applied, the first wing portion 958 and the second wing portion 959 are set to the reference posture extending from the shaft portion 957 to the left and right.

Further, the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) is arranged at a position directly below the upper stop portion 952, and the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) is arranged at a position directly below the lower stop portion 953. Has been done. In this embodiment, when the game balls are stopped at both the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, these game balls are the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 (. The second guide surface 959a) will fall at the (almost) right and left equal positions around the shaft portion 957 at the same time. As described above, when the game balls fall on the first wing portion 958 and the second wing portion 959 at the same time, the sorter 954 does not rotate substantially.

Further, a 15R guide passage 960 is provided on the left side of the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) and on the right side of the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a). Further, an 8R guide passage 961 is provided below the sorter 954. In addition, each 15R guide passage 960 is provided with a 15R ball entry detection switch 962 that detects a game ball guided by the 15R guide passage 960. Further, an 8R ball entry detection switch 963 that detects a game ball guided by the 8R guidance passage 961 is provided.

Then, when the stop shutter 954 is set to the open position from the state where the game ball is stopped in one of the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, the sorter 954 is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is engaged. The game ball is guided to the 8R guide passage 961. On the other hand, when the stop shutter 954 is set to the open position from the state where the game balls are stopped in both the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, these game balls are in the first wing portion 958 (first wing portion 958). The guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) guide the vehicle to the 15R guide passage 960.

Further, an upper early detection switch 964 for detecting the game ball stopped at the upper stop portion 952 and a lower early detection switch 965 for detecting the game ball stopped at the lower stop portion 953 are provided. In this embodiment, in the state where both the upper early detection switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 are detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays that the winning of "15R jackpot" is rich, and the upper early detection is performed. In a state where one of the switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 is detected and there is no possibility that the other is detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays that the winning of "8R jackpot" is rich. In a state where one of the upper early detection switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 is detected and the other is likely to be detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 wins the "15R jackpot". A display indicating that there is a possibility (promotion reception display) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) when guiding the game ball to the 15R guide passage 960, and the 15R guide A second entry route (in some cases, a second guide passage) is formed by the passage 960, and the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) or the second guide surface when guiding the game ball to the 8R guide passage 961. The wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) and the 8R guide passage 961 form a first entry route (in some cases, a first guide passage). Further, in a state where the game ball is stopped only in one of the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, the upper stop portion 952 or the lower stop portion 953 corresponds to the first stop portion, and the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 952 When the game ball is stopped in both of the lower stop parts 953, the upper stop part 952 and the lower stop part 953 correspond to the second stop part. By the way, in the present embodiment, if the game ball is not stopped at the upper stop portion 952, the game ball is not stopped at the lower stop portion 953, so that the upper stop portion 952 is substantially the first stop portion. , The lower stop 953 is the second stop.

As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot type is configured to differ depending on whether the game ball is stopped at both the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, or only one of them. There is. Even in this configuration, the action and effect of enjoying the stopping condition of the game ball in the type sorting device 741 can be achieved. Further, in this embodiment, when the game balls are stopped in both the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, both game balls are guided to the 15R guide passage 960, while being guided to the 8R guide passage 961. Since it is configured so as not to be guided, the game ball is stopped in both the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, and the jackpot state of "15R jackpot", which is more advantageous for the player, is given. Can be more reliably associated with.

(W) Next, a modified example of the type sorting device 741 shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) will be described. The type sorting device 741 of this embodiment is provided with a substantially disk-shaped crune 971 that enters the type lottery area 408 and guides a game ball passing through the start table 742. In the Kroon 971, the game ball that has passed through the start platform 742 is first guided, and the game ball is located on the outer peripheral portion 972 and the outer peripheral portion 972, which can orbit according to the momentum, and is located on the inner peripheral side, The inner peripheral portion 973 formed by arranging the retaining portions 974 in an annular shape is provided.

In this embodiment, the winning / failing lottery area 407 is omitted, the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 always enters the type lottery area 408, and the big hit depends on the behavior (winning destination) of the game ball in the type lottery area 408. It is configured so that the state is given and the type of jackpot to be given is determined. That is, there is a possibility that three or more game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in quick succession. Further, the game ball is configured to reach the type lottery area 408 earlier when the game ball is guided to the special passage 702 than when the game ball is guided to the normal passage 701 by the route distribution device 703. It may be done.

Below the crune 971, a stop shutter 954 is provided as a stop means for stopping the game ball that has entered the stop 974 at the stop 974. The retaining shutter 975 extends in the horizontal direction and is configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction and horizontally between the protruding position protruding downward from the crune 971 and the open position immersed in the front surface of the game board 30. .. When the stop shutter 975 is set to the protruding position, the game ball is set to the stop state of the type sorting device 741 capable of stopping at the stop portion 974, and when the stop shutter 975 is set to the open position, the stop portion is set. The game ball parked at 974 is guided to the downstream side (distributor 976, which will be described later), and is set to the guidance state of the type distribution device 741. The stop shutter 975 is set to the open position, for example, 5.5 seconds after the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, and is set to the protruding position, for example, 0.4 seconds after the open position (big hit). Always open position during the state).

A sorter 976 (sorting section) is provided below the stationary shutter 975. The sorter 976 is configured to be rotatable so that the rotation axis is in the front-rear direction, and has a shaft portion 977 arranged below the right portion of the crune 971 and a receiving plate portion 978 extending to the left from the shaft portion 977. A reference position in which the receiving plate portion 978 extends in a substantially horizontal direction (slightly inclined downward toward the left side) and a maximum inclined position in which the receiving plate portion 978 is inclined downward by about 60 to 80 degrees from the reference position. It is configured so that it can be displaced between them. Further, the sorter 976 is urged to the reference position side by a coil spring (not shown).

At the left position of the sorter 976, an out-of-passage 979 in which the game ball is guided by the sorter 976 at the reference position or a position near the reference position, and a game ball 976 at the maximum tilted position or a position near the same. The 15R guide passage 980 to which the ball is guided and the 8R guide passage 981 to which the game ball is guided by the sorter 976 located at the intermediate position between the reference position and the maximum inclination position are provided. When a game ball is detected by the detachment detection switch 982 provided in the detachment passage 979, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19. When a game ball is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 983 provided in the 15R guidance passage 980, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 and the jackpot state of "15R jackpot" is started. .. When a game ball is detected by the 8R ball entry detection switch 984 provided in the 8R guidance passage 981, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 and the jackpot state of "8R jackpot" is started. ..

The 8R guide passage 981 is longer than the detached passage 979, and the 15R guide passage 980 is longer than the 8R guide passage 981. As a result, the game ball guided to the 8R guide passage 981 or the 15R guide passage 980 is detected by the 8R guide passage 981 or the 15R guide passage 980 before the game ball guided to the detached passage 979 is detected by the detachment detection switch 982. Before the game ball detected by the ball entry detection switch 983 and guided to the 8R guidance passage 981 is detected by the 8R ball entry detection switch 984, the game ball guided to the 15R guidance passage 980 is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 981. It is configured to be detected by switch 983.

Then, when the stop shutter 975 is set to the open position from the state where the game balls are stopped at the eight stop portions 974, all the game balls stopped at each stop portion 974 are distributed at the reference position. It will fall into the vessel 976. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the game ball is guided to the detached passage 979, the 15R guide passage 980, or the 8R guide passage 981 depending on the number and arrangement of the game balls stopped at the eight stop portions 974. It has become like. That is, when the stop shutter 975 is set to the open position when only one game ball is stopped at the stop portion 974, the sorter 976 is substantially rotationally displaced even if the game ball falls on the sorter 976. Instead, the game ball is guided to the displacement passage 979. When the stop shutter 975 is set to the open position while the game ball is stopped in all of the eight stop portions 974, when the game ball falls into the sorter 976, the sorter 976 rotates to the maximum open position. Displaced and at least one of the game balls is guided to the 15R guide passage 980. In other cases, the greater the number of game balls placed on the stationary shutter 975, or the more the game balls fall locally (on the tip side of the receiving plate portion 978) even with the same number of balls, the more the distributor 976. Is greatly inclined toward the maximum open position side.

Further, an early detection switch 985 for detecting each game ball stopped at each stop 974 is provided. In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol display device 42, a suggestion display is performed based on the detection information of the early detection switch 985, such as the possibility that a jackpot state is given and what kind of jackpot state is given. It has become like. That is, when eight game balls are parked in the Kroon 971, "15R jackpot expectation max" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and one or two game balls are parked. Is displayed as "Still do your best", and if 3 or 4 game balls are parked, "The condition" is displayed and 5 to 7 game balls are parked. In that case, "I can still go" is displayed. In addition, not only the number information of the stopped game balls but also the arrangement information may be taken into consideration to display the suggestion.

In the present embodiment, the ball entry route is configured by the sorter 976 together with the detached passage 979, the 15R guide passage 980, and the 8R guide passage 981. Further, when the game ball stopped at the stop portion 974 is guided to the 15R guide passage 980 or the 8R guide passage 981 which is advantageous for the player, the stop portion 974 where the game ball is stopped is eventually stopped. Corresponds to the second stop.

As described above, depending on the number and arrangement of the game balls stopped by the type sorting device 741 (Crune 971) in the stopped state, the stopped game balls are disengaged from the aisle 979, the 15R guidance passage 980, and the 8R guidance. It is determined which of the passages 981 will be guided. That is, the player plays the game with the goal of stopping more game balls. Therefore, the above-mentioned action and effect such as enjoying the game performance such as inserting as many game balls as possible into the specific area 401 can be more reliably achieved.

Further, since the early detection switch 985 is provided individually corresponding to the eight stop portions 974, it is possible to surely grasp the number of stopped game balls and the like. Then, the game ball is in a state of being guided to the 15R guide passage 980, or the game ball stopped to generate a big hit state is still (how many) insufficient, and the color rendering property can be performed. Can be improved.

In the above (u), (v), and (w), the bottom of the stop portion is pulled out, and the game ball stopped at the stop portion is guided to the downstream side (guidance passage). However, for example, the stop portion of the distribution plate is configured as a bottomed recess, the distribution plate is configured to be rotatable by a driving means, and the distribution plate is stopped in a state where the game ball is stopped at the stop portion. The game ball stopped at the stop portion may be guided to the downstream side by rotating the portion downward.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments are described below.

A. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching means is guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with a specific ball-entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and is based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball-entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball-entry means is in an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area and the game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball-entry means in the same area. In some cases, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

In addition, in order to add fun to the behavior of the game ball from the time the game ball enters the specific area to the special entry means, the game ball that has entered the specific area is entered into the special entry means. There are some that have a sorting means that randomly sorts the balls into those that are allowed to enter and those that are not allowed to enter the ball. Further, the first guide route (normal route) capable of guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means and the game ball that has entered the specific area while interposing the distribution means or the like are described above. Some have a second guide route (special route) that can guide the ball to the special entry means with a higher probability than the first guide route.

By the way, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area at almost the same time, the player may be advantageous in allowing the game balls to enter the special ball entry means. However, there is a risk that the game balls will interfere with each other (such as by conflicting at the entrance to the 2nd guide route), making it impossible to expect to enter the 2nd guide route. is there. As a result, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area at almost the same time, contrary to the player's expectation, compared to the case where one game ball is inserted into a specific area one by one. There is a concern that the expectation of entering a special special ball entry means will decrease.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to allow a plurality of gaming balls to enter a specific area at once to more reliably advance the game advantageously. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

Means A-0-a. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
In a gaming machine provided with a specific ball-entry means having a specific area in which a gaming ball moving in the gaming area can enter.
The specific ball entry means
A first ball-entry means (non-special ball-entry means) in which a game ball that has entered the specific area is configured to be able to enter and a first grant is made when the game ball enters.
A second ball entry means (a second ball entry means in which a game ball that has entered the specific area is configured to be able to enter, and when the game ball enters, a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed. Special ball entry means) and
It is provided with a guide passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.
The guide passage
A first guide route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the second ball entry means, and
It is provided with a second guide route that can guide the game ball that has entered the specific area to the second ball entry means with a higher probability than the first guide route.
At the branch point between the first guide route and the second guide route, a route distribution means for guiding the game ball entering the specific area to the first guide route or the second guide route is provided.
The route distribution means
The state can be changed into a first guide state for guiding the game ball to the first guide route and a second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second guide route.
By guiding one game ball to the route distribution means, the game ball can be guided in the first guidance state.
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of gaming balls are guided to the route distribution means so that the gaming balls can be guided in the second guidance state.

According to the means A-0-a, a route distribution means is provided so that a plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route by inserting a plurality of game balls into a specific area. ing. For this reason, it is possible to match the fact that a plurality of game balls are collectively entered into a specific area and the expectation of entering a special ball entry means is increased, and as a result, a plurality of games can be entered into a specific area. The player's expectation that it will be advantageous to put the game ball into the special ball entry means because the balls are put together, and actually multiple game balls are guided to the second guide route. By doing so, it is possible to match that the expectation of entering the special ball entry means is increased. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which even if a plurality of game balls are collectively entered into a specific area, the expected degree of occurrence of the special ball entry means is not contributed, or rather is lowered, and the specific area can be entered. On the other hand, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the expectation of the player, such as improving the expectation of the generation of the special ball entry means by putting a plurality of game balls together.

In addition, "when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first privilege is given, and when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the player is better than the first privilege. A second privilege that is advantageous (beneficial) is given. " Examples of the "first privilege" referred to here include the provision of a first specified number of game values and the provision of a state such that it becomes easier to enter a specific ball entry means. In addition, "when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first advantageous state is given, and when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a game is played more than in the first advantageous state. A second advantageous state that is advantageous to the person is given. " The "first advantageous state" referred to here is not necessarily limited to the case where an advantageous state is given to the player, and by giving the first advantageous state, the status quo is maintained or is more disadvantageous than the current status. The purpose is to include the case of transition to the state.

Means A-0-b-1. The route distribution means is configured to be capable of changing the posture between a reference posture for guiding the game ball to the second guide route and a changing posture for guiding the game ball to the first guide route.
The gaming machine according to means A-0-a, wherein the reference posture is maintained by bringing the gaming balls into contact with specific locations existing at a plurality of locations of the route distribution means.

According to the means A-0-b, in order to maintain the reference position of the route distribution means, it is necessary to bring a plurality of game balls into a specific area to reach the route distribution means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the gameability that it is more advantageous for the player to insert a plurality of game balls than to insert one game ball into a specific area. Further, it is possible to add an interesting feature that the guide destination of the game ball changes depending on the balance of the route distribution means when guiding the game ball.

Means A-0-b-2. The specific location includes a first specific location and a second specific location.
A first introduction passage that guides a game ball that has entered the specific area to the first specific location, and
The gaming machine according to means A-0-b-1, characterized in that it includes a second introduction passage for guiding a gaming ball that has entered the specific region to the second specific location.

According to the means A-0-b-2, the chances of bringing the game ball into contact with the first specific place and the second specific place at the same time are increased, or the game ball is brought to the first specific place and the second specific place. The guiding (mounting) position can be set to a suitable position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the plurality of game balls that have entered the specific area are all guided to the second guide route.

Means A-0-b-3. A first approach detecting means for detecting a game ball moving in the first introduction passage, and
The gaming machine according to means A-0-b-2, which comprises a second approach detecting means for detecting a gaming ball moving in the second introduction passage.

According to the means A-0-b-3, it is possible to perform an effect such as teaching the player a moment that is pleasing to the player, such as two game balls being guided to the first specific place and the second specific place at the same time. it can.

Means A-0-c. The route distribution means is configured to be changeable between a reference posture for guiding the game ball to the first guide route and a changing posture for guiding the game ball to the second guide route.
Described in means A-0-a, wherein the route distribution means is configured to be capable of changing the posture from the reference posture to the changing posture when a load of a specific amount or more is received from the game ball. Game machine.

According to the means A-0-c, in order to change the posture of the route distribution means to the changing posture, it is necessary to bring a plurality of game balls into a specific area to reach the route distribution means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the gameability that it is more advantageous for the player to insert a plurality of game balls than to insert one game ball into a specific area. Further, by supporting a large number of game balls by the route distribution means, it is possible to add an interesting effect that the guide destination of the game balls changes to a better one.

Means A-1. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
In a gaming machine provided with a specific ball-entry means having a specific area in which a gaming ball moving in the gaming area can enter.
The specific ball entry means
A special ball entry means in which a game ball that has entered the specific area is configured to be able to enter, and a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is given when the game ball enters.
Among the game balls that have entered the specific area, the non-special entry means that the game balls other than the game balls that enter the special entry means enter.
It is provided with a guide passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means or the non-special ball entry means.
The guide passage
A first guide route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means, and
It is provided with a second guide route that can guide a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means with a higher probability than the first guide route.
At the branch point between the first guide route and the second guide route, a route distribution means for guiding the game ball entering the specific area to the first guide route or the second guide route is provided.
The route distribution means
When one game ball is guided to the route distribution means to distribute one game ball, the one game ball is guided to the first guide route.
By guiding a plurality of game balls to the route distribution means at the same time, when the plurality of game balls are distributed at the same time, all of the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the means A-1, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area at almost the same time, a route distribution means is provided so that all of the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route. There is. For this reason, it is possible to match the fact that a plurality of game balls are collectively entered into a specific area and the expectation of entering a special ball entry means is increased, and as a result, a plurality of games can be entered into a specific area. The player's expectation that it will be advantageous to put the game ball into the special ball entry means because the balls are put together, and actually multiple game balls are guided to the second guide route. By doing so, it is possible to match that the expectation of entering the special ball entry means is increased. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which even if a plurality of game balls are collectively entered into a specific area, the expected degree of occurrence of the special ball entry means is not contributed, or rather is lowered, and the specific area can be entered. On the other hand, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the expectation of the player, such as improving the expectation of the generation of the special ball entry means by putting a plurality of game balls together.

It should be noted that "the route distribution means may guide the game ball to the first guide route when distributing one game ball".

Means A-2. The route distribution means
A shaft part that is rotatably supported and
A first wing portion protruding from the shaft portion toward one side of the shaft portion,
A second wing portion that protrudes from the shaft portion toward the other side of the shaft portion is provided.
The first wing portion and the second wing portion are in an equilibrium state in a reference posture protruding from the shaft portion to both sides, and the upper surfaces of the first wing portion and the second wing portion in the reference posture are formed. The guide surface (which inclines downward toward both sides) communicates with the second guide route.
The game ball that has entered the specific area has a configuration of being guided by the guide surface of the first wing portion or the second wing portion.
When the game ball is guided to the first wing portion or the second wing portion, the route distribution means is rotated by the force received from the game ball, and the route distribution means is rotated to guide the game ball. The surface communicates with the first guide route, and the game ball is guided to the first guide route.
When the game ball is guided to the first wing portion and the second wing portion at substantially the same time, (the weight on the first wing portion side and the weight on the second wing portion side are balanced). ,) The first wing portion is maintained by maintaining the reference posture (the rotation of the route distribution means is suppressed) and maintaining the reference posture (the rotation of the route distribution means is avoided). The gaming machine according to the means A-1, wherein each of the gaming balls guided to the second wing portion is guided to the second guiding route.

According to the means A-2, it is possible to realize a configuration in which a plurality of (two) game balls are simultaneously guided to the second guide route while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Further, for example, as compared with the case where an elastic body such as a spring or rubber is used in the route distribution means, it is possible to prevent a defect that occurs due to deterioration of the elastic body. Further, it is not necessary to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution means, and the configuration and control can be simplified and compacted. In addition, there is a suspicion that the player feels distrust as compared with the configuration in which the detection means and the driving means for detecting the game ball are used to switch the route depending on whether or not there are a plurality of game balls. Can be reduced and fairness can be appealed.

Means A-3. A pair of a ball entry opening that is an entrance to the specific area of the specific ball entry means and a pair of blade members that open and close the ball entry opening are provided.
A game ball that has entered the specific area through the first ball-entry opening of the ball-entry opening is guided to the first wing portion (dropped on the guide surface of the first wing portion). 1 introduction passage and
A game ball that has entered the specific area through the second entry opening of the entry opening is guided to the second wing (dropped on the guide surface of the second wing). 2. The gaming machine according to means A-2, which comprises an introduction passage.

According to means A-3, the chances of bringing the game ball into contact with the first wing and the second wing at the same time are increased, and the game ball is guided (mounted) to the first wing and the second wing. ) The position can be set to a suitable position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the plurality of game balls that have entered the specific area are all guided to the second guide route. In addition, it is also possible to impart gametability such that the game ball is launched (aimed and desired) so that the game ball enters both the left and right entry ball openings.

Means A-4. A first approach detecting means for detecting a game ball moving in the first introduction passage, and
A second approach detecting means for detecting a game ball moving in the second introduction passage is provided.
In the process of determining the presence / absence of detection of the first approach detecting means and the second approach detecting means, either the case where the detection of both the first approach detecting means and the second approach detecting means is confirmed is confirmed. The gaming machine according to means A-3, wherein a different effect is derived from the case where only one of the detections is confirmed.

According to the means A-4, the player can recognize and enjoy the moment when the two game balls are simultaneously guided to the first wing part and the second wing part of the route distribution means, which is pleasing to the player. it can.

Means A-5. The route distribution means
A shaft part that is rotatably supported so that the central axis extends in the left-right direction,
A front piece portion that protrudes forward from the shaft portion and is arranged in the specific area, and a front piece portion.
It is provided with a rear piece portion that protrudes rearward from the shaft portion.
Among the route distribution means, the weight of the front piece portion side of the shaft portion is lighter than the weight of the rear piece portion side of the shaft portion.
The front piece portion closes the second guide route, and the guide surface forming the upper surface of the front piece portion communicates with the first guide route (and inclines downward toward the first guide route side). ) In equilibrium with the reference posture
The game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means is configured to be guided by the guide surface of the front piece portion.
When a predetermined number or more of game balls are placed on the front piece of the route distribution means in the reference posture, the front piece of the route distribution means is more than the shaft. The weight of the portion side becomes heavier than the weight of the rear piece portion side of the shaft portion, the route distribution means rotates so that the front piece portion tilts downward, and the route distribution means By rotating, the guide surface communicates with the second guide route, and the game ball is guided to the second guide route.
When the number of game balls mounted on the front piece of the route distribution means in the reference posture is less than the specified number, the weight of the route distribution means on the front piece side with respect to the shaft portion. The weight is lighter than the shaft portion and the weight on the rear piece side, the reference posture of the route sorting means is maintained (rotation is avoided), and the game ball is guided to the first guide route. The gaming machine according to means A-1, characterized in that the game is played.

According to the means A-5, it is possible to realize a configuration in which a plurality of game balls are simultaneously guided to the second guide route while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Further, for example, as compared with the case where an elastic body such as a spring or rubber is used in the route distribution means, it is possible to prevent a defect that occurs due to deterioration of the elastic body. Further, it is not necessary to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution means, and the configuration and control can be simplified and compacted.

Means A-6. The specific ball entry means
Special ball entry detection means (and,) that detects a game ball that has entered the special ball entry means.
A non-special ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the non-special ball entry means) is provided.
When a gaming ball is detected by the special ball entry detecting means (in a state other than the special gaming state or a state in which the right to generate the special gaming state has already been obtained), the special gaming state In a gaming machine that is granted the right to generate
A type lottery area for entering the special ball entry means and guiding the game ball detected by the special ball entry detection means is provided.
In a state where a game ball exists in the type lottery area, another game ball can enter the special ball entry means and enter the type lottery area.
In the type lottery area,
The first type of ball entry means and the second type of ball entry means on which a game ball can enter,
A first-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first-type ball entry means, and a first-type ball entry detection means.
A second-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second-type ball entry means is provided.
When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means (other than during the special game state or a state in which the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted has already been determined). In the state, the type of the special gaming state to which the right to generate is granted is set as the first special gaming state.
When a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry detection means (other than during the special game state or a state in which the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted has already been determined). In the state, the type of the special gaming state to which the right to generate is granted is set to the second special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.
The first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the first type entry detection means
Means A-1 to A characterized in that the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is configured to be longer than the second type determination time until it is detected by the second type entry detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of -5.

According to the means A-6, basically, the same action and effect as the means B-1 described later are exhibited. Further, when the configuration of the means A-1 is adopted, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area at almost the same time, all of these game balls are easily guided to the second guide route, which in turn leads to the second guide route. , There is a high possibility that a plurality of game balls will continuously enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, in such a configuration, by adopting the configuration of the present means A-6 in which it is not wasted that a plurality of game balls continuously enter the special ball entry means, a plurality of special ball entry means can be used. Even if the game balls are continuously entered, the action and effect of suppressing the deterioration of the interest caused by the waste or the loss will be more effectively achieved.

B. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching means is guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with a specific ball-entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and is based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball-entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball-entry means is in an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area and the game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball-entry means in the same area. In some cases, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

By the way, even if the game ball enters the special ball entry means during the special game state or in the state where the right of the special game state is obtained, a further (corresponding amount) special game state is granted. Not done. In other words, even if a relatively rare phenomenon occurs in which a plurality of game balls enter the special ball-entry means in succession, the right to be granted the special game state is only once, and the player loses. There is a concern that you may get the impression that it is a waste. As a result, there is a concern that even though a favorable situation for the player such as being granted a special gaming state has arrived, a situation may occur in which the player is not happy to let go.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in interest due to a plurality of gaming balls continuously entering a special ball entry means. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be used.

Means B-0-a. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
It is provided with a specific ball entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter.
The specific ball entry means
In a state where the game ball exists in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area.
In the specific area
The first type of ball entry means and the second type of ball entry means on which a game ball can enter,
A first-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first-type ball entry means, and a first-type ball entry detection means.
A second-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second-type ball entry means is provided.
When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means, the first grant is performed.
When a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry detection means, a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed, and the second grant is performed.
The first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the specific area is detected by the first type entry detection means
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball entered in the specific area is configured to be longer than the second type determination time until it is detected by the second type entry detecting means.

In addition, "when the game ball is detected by the first type entry detection means, the first privilege is given, and when the game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means, the first privilege is given. A second privilege that is more advantageous (beneficial) to the player is given. " Examples of the "first privilege" referred to here include the provision of a first specified number of game values and the provision of a state such that it becomes easier to enter a specific ball entry means. In addition, "when the game ball is detected by the first type entry detection means, the first advantageous state is given, and when the game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means, the first type. A second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state is given. " The "first advantageous state" referred to here is not necessarily limited to the case where an advantageous state is given to the player, and by giving the first advantageous state, the status quo is maintained or is more disadvantageous than the current status. The purpose is to include the case of transition to the state.

Means B-0-b. In the specific area
A first guide passage that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means, and
A second guide passage that leads the game ball to the second type of ball entry means, and
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball that has reached a predetermined position in the specific area to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided.
The entrance of the first guide passage is arranged on the upstream side of the movement path of the game ball in the specific area with respect to the entrance of the second guide passage.
The gaming machine according to means B-0-a, wherein the first guiding passage is configured so that the time required for the gaming ball to pass is longer than that of the second guiding passage.

Means B-0-c. A covering means arranged so as to cover the front of the first guide passage is provided.
The gaming machine according to means B-0-b, wherein the visibility of the gaming ball changes before and after the gaming ball enters the first guide passage.

Means B-0-d. The description of means B-0-b or means B-0-c, wherein an entrance display unit indicating each entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is provided so as to be visible from the front. A game machine.

Means B-1. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
It is provided with a specific ball entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter.
The specific ball entry means
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the specific area to enter,
(A non-special ball-entry means in which a game ball other than the game ball that enters the special ball-entry means among the game balls that have entered the specific area enters.)
Special ball entry detection means (and,) that detects a game ball that has entered the special ball entry means.
A non-special ball entry detection means) for detecting a game ball that has entered the non-special ball entry means) is provided.
When a gaming ball is detected by the special ball entry detecting means, it is advantageous for the player (in a special gaming state or in a state other than the state in which the right to generate the special gaming state has already been obtained. ) In a gaming machine that is granted the right to generate a special gaming state
A type lottery area for entering the special ball entry detecting means and guiding the game ball detected by the special ball entry detecting means is provided.
In a state where a game ball exists in the type lottery area, another game ball can enter the special ball entry means and enter the type lottery area.
In the type lottery area,
The first type of ball entry means and the second type of ball entry means on which a game ball can enter,
A first-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first-type ball entry means, and a first-type ball entry detection means.
A second-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second-type ball entry means is provided.
When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means (other than during the special game state or a state in which the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted has already been determined). In the state, the type of the special gaming state to which the right to generate is granted is set as the first special gaming state.
When a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry detection means (other than during the special game state or a state in which the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted has already been determined). In the state, the type of the special gaming state to which the right to generate is granted is set to the second special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.
The first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the first type entry detection means
A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is configured to be longer than the second type determination time until it is detected by the second type entry detection means.

According to the means B-1, the game ball that has entered the special entry means is not discharged to the outside of the game area (specific area) after being detected by the special entry detection means, but is located in the specific area. It is configured to enter a part of the type lottery area. Then, an analog lottery (type lottery) is performed to determine the type of the special game state, such as whether the game ball enters the first type ball entry means or the second type ball entry means. It has become. Therefore, when a game ball continuously enters the special ball entry means, the special game state granted corresponds to the game ball first detected by the special ball entry detection means among the game balls that have passed continuously. Although it is a single time, all of the plurality of game balls that have entered the special ball entry means almost continuously can be utilized in the subsequent type lottery.

Further, the first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the first type ball entry detection means that triggers the occurrence of the first special game state is longer than that of the first special game state. It is configured to be longer than the second type determination time until it is detected by the second type ball entry detecting means, which triggers the occurrence of the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, for example, among a plurality of game balls that have continuously entered the special ball entry means, the preceding game ball heads for the first type ball entry means, and the subsequent game ball heads for the second type ball entry means. Even in this case, the subsequent game ball can be first entered into the second type ball entry means to generate a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the subsequent game ball can be utilized more reliably. As a result, it is possible to suppress feelings such as loss or waste of the player due to the continuous entry of a plurality of game balls into the special ball entry means, and it is also possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by the loss. it can.

Means B-2. In the type lottery area,
A first guide passage that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means, and
A second guide passage that leads the game ball to the second type of ball entry means, and
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball that has entered the type lottery area to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided.
The entrance of the first guide passage is arranged on the upstream side of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area with respect to the entrance of the second guide passage.
The gaming machine according to means B-1, wherein the first guiding passage is configured so that the time required for the gaming ball to pass is longer than that of the second guiding passage.

According to means B-2, the game ball that entered the type lottery area was not guided to the type 1 ball entry means in the type sorting means (it was not dropped by the "sieve" corresponding to the type 1 ball entry means. In that case, the game ball is guided to the second type ball entry means. In other words, it is possible to expect excitement in the game by bringing the ball into the second type of ball entry means, which is advantageous for the player, later (so that the one that remains until the end gives a better result). it can.

Further, as described above, among the first guide passage and the second guide passage, the entrance of the passage that can be expected to occur in a special gaming state that is more advantageous for the player is arranged on the downstream side. In this case, for example, when two game balls enter the two type lottery areas in succession, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the second guide passage side by the type distribution means, the succeeding game ball is classified by type. When guided to the first guide passage side by means, the subsequent game ball reaches the first guide passage earlier.

In this respect, according to this means, the first guide passage is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the second guide passage (long distance, loose angle, etc.). Therefore, for example, even though the preceding game ball is guided to the second guide passage, the succeeding game ball is guided to the first guide passage, and the preceding game ball is the second type entry means. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which a subsequent game ball enters the first-type ball entry means and a first special game state occurs before the ball enters the ball.

The second guide passage may have a shorter time required for the game ball to pass than the first guide passage. For example, the second guide passage has a configuration in which the ball is directly entered into the second type entry means from the type distribution means (second type). The purpose is to include (conceptually consider a second guide passage such that the distance of the guide passage is zero). Further, in order to lengthen the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guide passage, it is conceivable to increase the moving distance of the game ball required for passing through the first guide passage. In this case, the distance of the first guide passage is increased. Not only the configuration to lengthen the game ball, but also, for example, a delay means for the game ball to make several round trips or laps in the same place and then move forward, or to temporarily stop the momentum of the game ball and take a relatively long time. A configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for guiding to the next place is installed in the first guide passage. By the way, such a delay means may be installed in the second guide passage, but in that case, the time required for the game ball to pass through the second guide passage is longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guide passage. Install something that will not be long.

Means B-3. An early detection means for detecting a game ball moving in the first guide passage is provided.
Described in means B-2, wherein a preceding opening effect suggesting that the first special gaming state is started can be derived when detection is performed by the early detection means. Gaming machine.

Although it is confirmed that the game ball that has entered the first guide passage will enter the first type ball entry means, the passage time of the game ball through the first guide passage is longer than that of the second guide passage. Due to the configuration, there is a relatively long time lag between when the game ball enters the first guidance passage and when it enters the first type entry means (until it is detected by the first type entry detection means). It is possible that it will occur. In this case, for example, when the game ball enters the special ball entry means in a single shot and further enters the first guide passage, it is determined that the first special game state occurs at this point (player). Although it is not in the second special game state, it may be a little disappointing), but it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to pass through the first guide passage, so it is quite the first. It is conceivable that the special game state may not be started.

In this regard, according to the means B-3, a preceding opening effect suggesting that the first special game state is started when the game ball is detected by the early detection means installed in the first guide passage is derived. It is configured to be possible so that such concerns can be dispelled. Therefore, it takes too much time (no reaction) between the time when the occurrence of the first special game state is practically determined and the time when the first special game state is started, and the tempo of the game becomes worse. It is possible to deter situations such as causing a decline in interest.

The preceding opening effect is different from the opening effect performed as a part of the special game state, and is not included in the first special game state (even if the appearance is the same, it is a pseudo opening effect). The first special gaming state is not started when the detection by the early detection means is performed, but the first special gaming state is started when the detection by the first ball entry detection means is performed.

Further, "when the detection by the early detection means is performed, the uncertain element determination process for determining whether or not a game ball other than the game ball for which the detection is performed exists in the specific region, and the uncertain factor determination process, and the non-determination process. Corresponds to the entry into the first type ball entry means guided by the first guide passage provided with the early detection means in which the game ball is detected when a negative determination is made in the deterministic element determination process. It may be configured so that the preceding opening process for deriving the preceding opening effect that teaches that the first special gaming state is started can be executed. " In this case, another game ball is sent to the first type entry detection means or the second type entry detection means before the game ball detected by the early detection means is detected by the first type entry detection means. By being detected, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the mode of the preceding opening effect and the type of the special gaming state that actually occurs, and the first special gaming state occurs in the preceding opening effect. Can be taught. In addition, when the type of the special gaming state is not taught in the preceding opening effect (when it is taught that either the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state occurs), such a problem occurs. Although it does not occur, it is possible to improve the color rendering index and give the player a sense of security if the type of the special gaming state can be taught.

Means B-4. In the first special gaming state, the first opening pattern in which the opening effect for teaching that the first special gaming state is started is performed for the first hour, and the second opening effect is shorter than the first time. There is a second opening pattern that is performed for a time or the opening effect is omitted.
When the first type of ball entry detection means is detected and the first special gaming state is generated, if the preceding opening effect is derived, the second opening pattern is selected. The gaming machine according to the featured means B-3.

According to the means B-4, when the preceding opening effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the opening effect from becoming too long by further performing the opening effect for the first hour. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid problems such as deterioration of the tempo of the game.

Means B-5. An approach detecting means for detecting all the game balls (immediately after) entering the specific area on the upstream side of the special entering means and the non-special entering means,
The number of game balls in the specific area can be counted, and the value is added based on the detection of the approach detection means, and the non-special entry detection means, the early detection means, and the second type. The gaming machine according to means B-3 or B-4, characterized in that the first counting means for which a value is subtracted based on the detection of the ball entry detecting means is provided.

According to the means B-5, for example, it is determined whether or not a ball clogging has occurred, and whether or not a game ball exists in a specific region in addition to the game ball detected by the early detection means. It can be discriminated and the like. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the playability and the effect. ..

Means B-6. When the early detection means is detected, the non-special ball entry detection means, the early detection means, and the first It is determined whether or not the game ball exists in the area on the upstream side of the two-type ball entry detection means, the preceding opening effect is derived when it is determined that the game ball does not exist, and when it is determined that the game ball exists, the above-mentioned A promotion reception state teaching means for teaching that the type of the special game state has not yet been determined (there is a possibility that the game ball enters the second guide passage) is the promotion reception state is provided. The gaming machine according to means B-5.

According to the means B-6, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area and the preceding game ball enters the first guide passage, the first special game state still occurs. It is possible to make sure that the player recognizes that the configuration is such that the second special gaming state may occur unless the subsequent gaming ball enters the first guiding passage, which has not been determined. it can. Therefore, it is possible to have the player understand the game playability more reliably, and when the situation as in the above example occurs, the behavior of the subsequent game ball, the game ball continuously entering the type lottery area, etc. You can get a stronger interest in.

Means B-7. The number of game balls in the specific area can be counted, and the value is added based on the detection of the early detection means, and the value is subtracted based on the detection of the first type entry detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-3 to B-6, which comprises two counting means.

According to the means B-7, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not ball clogging has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the playability and the effect. ..

Means B-8. The specific ball entry means includes a guide passage for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means or the non-special ball entry means.
The guide passage
A first guide route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means, and
It is provided with a second guide route that can guide a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means with a higher probability than the first guide route.
At the branch point between the first guide route and the second guide route, a route distribution means for guiding the game ball entering the specific area to the first guide route or the second guide route is provided.
The route distribution means
When one game ball is guided to the route distribution means to distribute one game ball, the one game ball is guided to the first guide route.
By guiding a plurality of game balls to the route distribution means at the same time, when the plurality of game balls are distributed at the same time, all of the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7.

According to the means B-8, basically the same effects as those of the above means A-1 are exhibited. Further, when the configuration of the means B-8 is adopted, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area at almost the same time, all of these game balls are easily guided to the second guide route. As a result, there is a high possibility that a plurality of game balls will continuously enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, in such a configuration, by adopting the configuration of the means B-1 in which it is not wasted that a plurality of game balls continuously enter the special ball entry means, a plurality of games are used in the special ball entry means. Even if the balls enter the ball continuously, it is wasted or the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the interest caused by the loss is more effectively achieved.

Means B-9. A covering means is provided so as to cover the front of the first guide passage (and reduce the visibility of the first guide passage).
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8, wherein the visibility of the gaming ball changes before and after the gaming ball enters the first guide passage.

According to the means B-9, the entrance of the first guide passage can be regarded as the entrance of the first type ball entry means. Therefore, basically, it is possible to make it easier to understand the premise of game playability that the first special game state occurs when the ball enters the entrance of the first guide passage. Further, by visually recognizing the first guide passage having a shape that delays the game ball, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the design and the complicated appearance of the type lottery area.

Means B-10. A first guide passage that leads a game ball moving in the specific area to the first type ball entry means, and
In a configuration including a second guide passage that leads a game ball moving in the specific area to the second type ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-9, wherein an entrance display unit indicating each entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is provided so as to be visible from the front. ..

According to the means B-10, the locations of the entrances of the first guide passage and the second guide passage are clarified, and it is easier to understand the playability such as whether the game ball enters the first guide passage or the second guide passage. can do. The entrance display unit may be configured so that the mode can be changed based on the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the corresponding entry route.

Means B-11. It is provided with an approach detecting means for detecting all the game balls (immediately after) entering the specific area on the upstream side of the special entering means and the non-special entering means.
Means B-1 to B characterized in that the approach detection means, the first type entry detection means, and the detection history storage means for accumulating and storing the detection information of the second type entry detection means are provided. The gaming machine according to any one of -10.

According to the means B-11, since the behavior history of the game ball in a specific area is left more clearly, a trouble occurs between the player and the game hole where the game ball enters, which is complicated. Can be avoided. The detection history storage means may be configured to store and store the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to more reliably investigate misunderstandings including the preceding opening effect. Further, the stored contents of the detection history storage means may be configured to be derivable to the display means of the gaming machine. Further, the detection information may be externally output so that the same detection information as the detection history storage means can be grasped by the hall computer. In addition, when the time of the time grasping means for grasping the current time provided in the gaming machine and the detection history are stored in association with each other, such an action effect is more remarkably exhibited.

Means B-12. A type entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the type lottery area, and a type entry detecting means.
Vibration detection means for detecting vibration of gaming machines and
Equipped with display means
Any of the means B-1 to B-11, wherein when the type entry detecting means is detected, a display calling attention not to vibrate the gaming machine is derived in the display means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means B-12, it is possible to prevent the player from being too absorbed in the game and shaking the gaming machine, and the shaking of the gaming machine causes a change in the behavior of the gaming ball. Such a situation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfavorable situation for both the player such as the gaming machine vibrating and the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed.

C. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching means is guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with a specific ball-entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and is based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball-entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball-entry means is in an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area and the game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball-entry means in the same area. In some cases, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a demand for new improvements in interest, such as by constantly incorporating new configurations.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of adding new interests.

Means C-1. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
It is provided with a specific ball entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter.
The specific ball entry means
In a state where the game ball exists in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area.
In the specific area
The first type of ball entry means and the second type of ball entry means on which a game ball can enter,
A first-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first-type ball entry means, and a first-type ball entry detection means.
A second-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second-type ball entry means is provided.
When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means, the first grant is performed.
In a gaming machine in which, when a game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means, a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed.
A first type of ball that moves in the specific area is configured to be accessible, and the entered game ball always enters the first type of ball entry means (detected by the first type of ball entry detection means). The entry route and
A second type of ball that moves in the specific area is configured to be accessible, and the entered game ball always enters the second type of ball entry means (detected by the second type of ball entry detection means). The entry route and
An early detection means for detecting a game ball, which is provided on at least one of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an early teaching means capable of teaching information regarding detection by the early detecting means.

According to the means C-1, the game ball enters the first-type ball-entry means or the second-type ball-entry means, and the game ball enters the first-type ball-entry means or the second-type ball-entry means. It is possible to grasp at a stage before the ball and give the corresponding teaching. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect related to the entry of a game ball into the first type entry means or the second type entry means from the stage before the entry. In addition, although it should have been decided to enter the first type ball entry means or the second type ball entry means, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of incongruity that there is no corresponding reaction (sound effect, display, etc.).

Means C-2. The entrance of the first ball entry route is arranged on the upstream side of the movement path of the game ball in the specific area with respect to the entrance of the second ball entry route.
The first ball entry route is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the second ball entry route.
The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein the early detection means includes at least a first early detection means provided on the first entry route.

According to the means C-2, the game ball that has entered the specific area can enter the second entry route if it does not enter the first entry route. In other words, it is possible to expect excitement in the game by bringing the ball into the second type of ball entry means, which is advantageous for the player, later (so that the one that remains until the end gives a better result). it can.

Further, as described above, the entrance of the second entry route, which is expected to give the second ball more advantageous to the player among the first entry route and the second entry route, is arranged on the downstream side. In the case of adopting such a configuration, for example, when two game balls enter a specific area in succession, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the second entry route side, the succeeding game ball is the first. When guided to the entry route side, there is a concern that the subsequent game ball will reach the first entry route earlier.

In this respect, according to this means, the first ball entry route is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer (long distance, loose angle, etc.) than the second ball entry route. .. Therefore, for example, even though the preceding game ball is guided to the second entry route, the succeeding game ball is guided to the first entry route, and the preceding game ball enters the second type. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which a subsequent game ball enters the first type ball entering means before entering the ball means, and the first grant occurs.

Further, when the time required for the game ball to pass through the first entry route is lengthened, the game ball enters the first entry route, then enters the first type entry means, and enters the first type. There is a concern that a relatively large time lag will occur before the ball is detected by the ball detecting means. In this means, an early detection switch is provided on the first entry route, and it is possible to derive a reaction (sound effect, display, etc.) corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first entry route. Become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of incongruity that the behavior of the gaming ball and the reaction of the gaming machine deviate from each other.

Means C-3. Described in means C-2, wherein when the detection by the first early detection means is performed, the preceding opening effect suggesting that the first grant is performed can be derived. Amusement machine.

According to the means C-3, when the game ball is detected by the first early detection means installed on the first entry route, it is possible to derive a preceding opening effect suggesting that the first grant is performed. Because of the configuration, for example, when a game ball enters a specific area in a single shot and then enters the first entry route, the first grant is decided at this point (the first grant as a player). 2 It may be a little disappointing because it is not in a special game state), but it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to pass through the first entry route, so it is quite a first grant. It is possible to avoid a situation in which is not performed. Therefore, it takes too much time (no reaction) between the time when the first grant is actually decided and the time when the first grant is made, the tempo of the game becomes worse, and the interest is lowered. It is possible to deter situations such as.

Means C-4. When the first grant and the second grant are made, the first grant and the second grant are performed at the beginning of the first grant and the second grant. An opening production that teaches you to be done is performed,
When the first type ball entry detection means and the second type ball entry detection means are detected,
In the state where the preceding opening effect is not performed, the first grant or the second grant of the first opening pattern in which the opening effect is performed for the first hour is started.
In the state where the preceding opening effect is performed, the opening effect is performed for a second time shorter than the first time, or the first addition of the second opening pattern in which the opening effect is omitted, or the first addition of the opening pattern is performed. , The gaming machine according to means C-3, wherein the second grant is started.

According to the means C-4, when the preceding opening effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the opening effect from becoming too long by further performing the opening effect for the first hour. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid problems such as deterioration of the tempo of the game.

Means C-5. An approach detection means for detecting all the game balls (immediately after) entering the specific area on the upstream side of the first entry route and the second entry route.
The number of game balls in the specific area can be counted, and the value is added based on the detection of the approach detection means, and the detection of the first early detection means and the second type entry detection means. The gaming machine according to means C-3 or C-4, which comprises a first counting means from which a value is subtracted based on.

According to the means C-5, for example, it is determined whether or not a ball jam occurs in a specific area, and in the specific area, a game ball exists in addition to the game ball detected by the early detection means. It is possible to determine whether or not it is. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the playability and the effect. ..

Means C-6. When the early detection means is detected, the downstream side of the approach detection means and the upstream side of the early detection means and the second type of ball entry detection means based on the value of the first counting means. It is determined whether or not the gaming ball exists in the area on the side, and if it is determined that it does not exist, the preceding opening effect is derived, and if it is determined that it exists (not the preceding opening effect). The game according to means C-5, wherein the promotion reception state teaching means for teaching that the game ball is in the promotion reception state with the possibility of the game ball entering the second entry route is provided. Machine.

According to means C-6, for example, when two game balls enter a specific area and the preceding game ball enters the first entry route, the first grant has not yet been decided. , As long as the subsequent game ball does not enter the first entry route, the player can be surely recognized that the configuration is such that the possibility of the second grant being made remains. Therefore, it is possible to have the player understand the game playability more reliably, and when the situation as in the above example occurs, the behavior of the subsequent game ball, the continuous entry of the game ball into a specific area, etc. On the other hand, you can get a stronger interest.

Means C-7. A means C including a second counting means in which a value is added based on the detection of the early detection means and a value is subtracted based on the detection of the first type ball entry detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of -3 to C-6.

According to the means C-7, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not a ball clogging has occurred in the first ball entry route. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the playability and the effect. ..

Means C-8. In the specific area
The first guide passage that constitutes the first ball entry route that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means, and
A second guide passage that constitutes the second ball entry route that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means, and
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided.
A covering means is provided so as to cover the front of the first guide passage (and reduce the visibility of the first guide passage).
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-7, wherein the visibility of the gaming ball changes before and after the gaming ball enters the first guide passage.

According to the means C-8, the entrance of the first guide passage can be regarded as the entrance of the first type ball entry means. Therefore, basically, it is possible to make it easier to understand the premise of playability that the first grant is performed when the ball enters the entrance of the first guide passage. Further, by visually recognizing the first guide passage having a shape that delays the game ball, it is possible to prevent the design from being deteriorated and the specific region from appearing complicated.

Means C-9. 4. The means according to any one of means C-1 to C-8, wherein an entrance display unit indicating each entrance of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route is provided so as to be visible from the front. Gaming machine.

According to the means C-9, the location of the entrance of the first entry route and the second entry route is clarified, and the game property such as whether the game ball enters the first entry route or the second entry route. Can be made easier to understand. The entrance display unit may be configured so that the mode can be changed based on the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the corresponding entry route.

Means C-10. In the specific area
The first guide passage that constitutes the first ball entry route that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means, and
A second guide passage that constitutes the second ball entry route that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means, and
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided.
The type sorting means can change the state between a stationary state in which the game ball reaching the type sorting means is stopped by the type sorting means and a guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the first guidance passage or the second guidance passage. It is configured to be provided with a stopping means to change the state between the stopped state and the guided state at predetermined time intervals or based on a predetermined trigger.
The type sorting means includes a stop portion in which the game ball is stopped in the stopped state.
In the stop portion, when the type sorting means is in the guidance state, the stopped game ball is guided to the first guide passage, and the stopped game ball is the first stop portion. Equipped with a second stop guided by 2 guide passages,
The first guide passage and the first stop portion constitute the first ball entry route, and the second guide passage and the second stop portion constitute the second ball entry route.
The early detection means
A first standby detecting means (first early detecting means) for detecting a game ball stopped at the first stopping portion, and
A second standby detecting means for detecting a game ball stopped at the second stopping portion is provided.
The early teaching means is any one of means C-1 to C-9, which is configured to be able to teach information regarding detection information by the first standby detecting means and the second standby detecting means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the means C-10, based on the detection information of the standby detecting means in the stopped state of the type sorting means, for example, if the type sorting means is currently in the guidance state, the game ball is guided to the second guidance passage. It is possible to teach that (the second grant is made), or that at present, the game ball is only guided to the first guide passage (the first grant is made). It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effectability of the type sorting means in the stationary state and to improve the interest.

In addition, "when the game ball is stopped at the second stop, the type sorting means is in the guidance state regardless of whether or not the game ball is stopped at the first stop." As a result, the game ball stopped at the second stop portion is guided to the second guide passage, and the second grant is performed based on the detection of the second type entry detection means. " Good.

D. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching means is guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with a specific ball-entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and is based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball-entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball-entry means is in an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area and the game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball-entry means in the same area. In some cases, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

By the way, even if the game ball enters the special ball entry means during the special game state or in the state where the right of the special game state is obtained, a further (corresponding amount) special game state is granted. Not done. In other words, even if a relatively rare phenomenon occurs in which a plurality of game balls enter the special ball-entry means in succession, the right to be granted the special game state is only once, and the player loses. There is a concern that you may get the impression that it is a waste. As a result, there is a concern that even though a favorable situation for the player such as being granted a special gaming state has arrived, a situation may occur in which the player is not happy to let go.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is a game capable of suppressing a decrease in interest due to a plurality of game balls entering the special ball entry means. It is to provide an opportunity.

Means D-0. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
It is provided with a specific ball entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter.
The specific ball entry means
In a state where the game ball exists in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area.
In the specific area
The first type of ball entry means and the second type of ball entry means on which a game ball can enter,
A first-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first-type ball entry means, and a first-type ball entry detection means.
A second-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second-type ball entry means is provided.
When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means, the first grant is performed.
In a gaming machine in which, when a game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means, a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed.
In the specific area
A first guide passage that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means, and
A second guide passage that leads the game ball to the second type of ball entry means, and
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided.
The type sorting means distributes the n game balls, which are more than m, at the same time, as compared with the case where the m game balls that have reached the type sorting means are simultaneously sorted. 2 A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to increase the ratio of guiding to a guidance passage.

Means D-1. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
It is provided with a specific ball entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter.
The specific ball entry means
In a state where the game ball exists in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area.
In the specific area
The first type of ball entry means and the second type of ball entry means on which a game ball can enter,
A first-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first-type ball entry means, and a first-type ball entry detection means.
A second-type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second-type ball entry means is provided.
When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means, the first grant is performed.
In a gaming machine in which, when a game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means, a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed.
In the specific area
A first guide passage that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means, and
A second guide passage that leads the game ball to the second type of ball entry means, and
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided.
The type sorting means can change the state between a stationary state in which the game ball reaching the type sorting means is stopped by the type sorting means and a guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the first guidance passage or the second guidance passage. It is configured to be provided with a stopping means to change the state between the stopped state and the guided state at predetermined time intervals or based on a predetermined trigger.
The type sorting means includes a stop portion in which the game ball is stopped in the stopped state.
In the stop portion, when the type sorting means is in the guidance state, the stopped game ball is guided to the first guide passage, and the stopped game ball is the first stop portion. Equipped with a second stop guided by 2 guide passages,
When the game ball is stopped at the second stop portion, the type sorting means is set to the guidance state regardless of whether or not the game ball is stopped at the first stop portion. The gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball stopped at the second stopping portion is guided to the second guiding passage, and the second grant is performed based on the detection of the second type ball entry detecting means. ..

According to the means D-1, for example, when the game ball is stopped at both the first stop portion and the second stop portion, the type sorting means is set to the guide state, so that the game ball is guided to the second guide passage. A second grant is made based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means. Therefore, for example, although the game ball stopped at the second stop portion is guided to the second guide passage, the game ball stopped at the first stop portion is also guided to the first guide passage. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of an unpleasant phenomenon such that the second grant is not performed (it becomes the first grant). Therefore, it is possible to secure an easy-to-understand game property that the game ball should be stopped at the second stop portion and the game ball should be guided to the second guide passage. ) Can be clarified.

Furthermore, it is easier to stop the game ball at the second stop when a large number of game balls are put into the specific area of the specific ball entry means, and it is necessary to be afraid that the game ball will be stopped at the first stop. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to associate a large number of game balls in a specific area with an advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the situation of having a negative image of entering the game ball into the specific area of the specific ball entry means, and to make the game ball enter the specific area as much as possible. You can enjoy it.

In addition, "in the state where the first grant is decided and the state where the second grant is decided, the first type ball entry detection means and the second type ball entry detection means. Even when the detection of the above is performed, the corresponding first grant and the second grant are not performed. "

Further, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the first stop portion and the second stop portion and the first guide passage and the second guide passage have a one-to-one correspondence, and the first stop portion and the second stop portion are stopped by the type sorting means in the stopped state. It suffices that the arrangement or number of the game balls in the game determines whether or not the game balls are guided to the second guide passage. For example, the stop portions A, B, and C may exist, the stop portions A and B correspond to the first stop portion, and the stop portion C may correspond to the second stop portion. For example, the stop portion A, When B exists and the game ball is stopped only in one of the stop portions A and B, the game ball is guided to the first guide passage, and in that case, the game ball is stopped. If the stop portions A and B correspond to the first stop portion and the game ball is stopped at both the stop portions A and B, the game ball is guided to the second guide passage, and in that case, The stop portions A and B may be configured to correspond to the second stop portion.

Means D-2. The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the first stopping portion and the second stopping portion are formed in a concave shape capable of accommodating a game ball in the stopped state of the type sorting means.

According to the means D-2, the game ball stopped at the first stop portion and the second stop portion can be more reliably held (positioned) at the first stop portion and the second stop portion. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the stopped game ball is guided to the second guide passage while the game ball is stopped by the type sorting means. Further, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the game ball is guided to the second guide passage, as compared with the configuration in which the game ball enters the second guide passage by the flow without staying. Further, it is possible to enjoy the state in which it is confirmed that the game ball is guided to the second guide passage, and it is possible to more carefully visually recognize how the game ball is guided to the second guide passage. Therefore, it is possible to secure the playability such that the game ball is stopped by the type sorting means.

Means D-3. A first standby detecting means for detecting a game ball stopped at the first stopping portion, and a first standby detecting means.
A second standby detecting means for detecting a game ball stopped at the second stopping portion, and
The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, wherein the first standby detecting means and the standby teaching means capable of teaching information regarding detection information by the second standby detecting means are provided. ..

According to the means D-3, based on the detection information of the standby detecting means in the stopped state of the type sorting means, for example, if the type sorting means is currently in the guidance state, the game ball is guided to the second guidance passage. It is possible to teach that (the second grant is made), or that at present, the game ball is only guided to the first guide passage (the first grant is made). It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effectability of the type sorting means in the stationary state and to improve the interest.

In particular, when the stopped game ball is positioned as in the above means D-2, when the game ball is stopped at the first stop portion or the second stop portion, the game ball becomes the first stop. It is determined whether the guide passage or the second guide passage is guided, and the accuracy of teaching based on the detection information to the standby detection means is improved. Therefore, the above-mentioned action and effect are more reliably achieved.

Means D-4. When the game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means, the first game state is given as the first grant, and the first game state is given.
When a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry detection means, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is given as the second grant.
In the state in which the granting of the first gaming state is determined, the state in which the granting of the second gaming state is determined, the first gaming state, and the second gaming state, the first type of ball is entered. Even when the detection means and the second type ball entry detection means are detected, the corresponding first grant and the second grant are not performed.
The first guide passage is described in any one of means D-1 to D-3, wherein the first guide passage is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the second guide passage. A game machine.

According to the means D-4, when the type sorting means is set to the guidance state in the state where the game ball is stopped at the first stop portion and the second stop portion, the game ball stopped at the first stop portion. Is detected by the second type entry detection means before the game ball stopped at the second stop is detected by the first type entry detection means. Therefore, the action and effect of the above means D-1 such as enjoying the game performance such as inserting as many game balls as possible into a specific area can be more reliably achieved.

By adopting this configuration, when the game ball is stopped at both the first stop portion and the second stop portion, the game ball stopped at the first stop portion enters the first guide passage. Even if the ball is granted, the second grant can be made. Therefore, for example, when the game ball is stopped at both the first stop portion and the second stop portion, the game ball is stopped at the first stop portion. It is not necessary to separately provide a configuration for preventing the game ball from entering the first guide passage.

Means D-5. The second stop is arranged on the downstream side of the first stop, and the game ball is stopped at the first stop so that the game ball reaches the second stop. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that it is configured to be stationary.

According to the means D-5, by bringing a plurality of game balls to the type sorting means, it is possible to enjoy the appearance of stepping up to be advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to take a good impression that the game ball is stopped at the first stop portion.

Means D-6. The type sorting means includes a sorting unit that guides a game ball stopped by the stopping means to the first guide passage or the second guide passage when the type sorting means is in the guidance state.
When the number of game balls stopped by the stopping means is m, all the stopped game balls are guided to the first guide passage by the sorting unit.
When the number of game balls stopped by the stopping means is n, which is more than m, at least one of the stopped game balls is guided to the second guide passage by the sorting unit. The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2.

According to the means D-6, whether or not the game balls guided to the second guide passage appear is determined by the number of the game balls stopped by the type sorting means in the stopped state. That is, the player plays the game with the goal of stopping n game balls in the type sorting means. Therefore, the action and effect of the means D-1 such as enjoying the game playability such as inserting as many game balls as possible into a specific area can be more reliably achieved. Furthermore, by making a plurality of game balls reach the type sorting means, it is possible to enjoy the appearance of stepping up to be advantageous to the player.

In this means, when the type sorting means is set to the guidance state and at least one of the stopped game balls is guided to the second guide passage, those game balls are stopped. When the stop portion (as a result) corresponds to the second stop portion, the type sorting means is set to the guidance state, and all the stopped game balls are guided to the first guidance passage. , The stop where those game balls were stopped corresponds to (as a result) the first stop.

Means D-7. The stop portion is formed in a concave shape capable of accommodating one game ball at a time in the stop state of the type sorting means.
A standby detection means for detecting a game ball stopped at the stop is provided corresponding to each stop, and a standby detection means is provided.
The game according to means D-6, wherein a teaching means capable of teaching information regarding the number of game balls parked in the type sorting means is provided based on the detection information of the standby detecting means. Machine.

According to the means D-7, it is possible to surely grasp the number of game balls and the like stopped by the standby detecting means. Then, it is possible to perform an effect such that the number of stopped game balls is n, or the number of stopped game balls is still (how many) insufficient, and the color rendering index is improved. Etc. can be planned.

Means D-8. A arrival detection means for detecting a game ball that enters the specific area and always reaches the type distribution means is provided.
The stopping means is brought into a driving state when the arrival detecting means is detected.
One of the means D-1 to D-7, characterized in that the type sorting means is put into a drive stop state at a reference position where the type sorting means is put into the stopped state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Described gaming machine.

According to the means D-8, the type sorting means does not stop the game ball that has reached the type sorting means, as in the case where the stopping means continues to operate and the type sorting means changes to the stopped state and the guidance state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a case of passing through is generated. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably enjoy the real pleasure of enjoying the state of the game ball staying in the type sorting means. In addition, it is possible to give a special feeling when the stopping means is driven while saving energy.

In addition, there are an effective state in which the detection of the first type ball entry detection means and the second type ball entry detection means is valid and an invalid invalid state, and the first type ball entry detection means and the second type entry When the ball detecting means is detected, the state is switched to the invalid state, the first grant or the second grant is performed, and when the game ball disappears in the specific area, the valid state is set. It may be switched.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied are shown below.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching An example is a ball game machine provided with a game area in which the game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operating port, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface or the like) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. A ball-and-ball game machine provided with a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) so that the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The game machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball game machines, is a pachinko machine or a game machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 33a, 33b ... Starting winning device, 33c ... Opening and closing member, 37 ... Central winning unit, 42 ... Decorative symbol display device, 43 ... Special display device, 224a, 224b ... Starting winning switch, 261 ... Main control device , 262 ... Sub-control device, 401 ... Specific area, 403 ... Ball opening, 404 ... Blade member, 410 ... Rotating body unit, 414 ... Rotating body, 416 ... Pocket part, 416a ... Special pocket part, 427 ... Safe passage 428 ... Out passage, 437 ... Ball entry count switch, 461 ... Special ball entry detection switch, 462 ... Non-special ball entry detection switch.

Claims (2)

The state where the first result is waiting and
There may be a situation where the second result is waiting.
The second result is more favorable to the player than the first result.
Both the first result and the second result may be in a waiting state.
In a state where the first result is waiting and the second result is not waiting, it is taught that the first result is waiting, and the first result and the second result are A first waiting teaching means capable of teaching that both the first result and the second result are waiting in a state where both of the above are waiting.
In a state where the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, the first result and the second result are not taught that the first result is awaited. A second standby teaching means capable of teaching that the first result is not waiting but that the second result is waiting in a state where both of the above and the above are waiting .
A game characterized in that it is provided with a means for allowing a player to recognize in advance a state in which the first result is awaited and a timing in which the state in which the second result is awaited is resolved. Machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images